Sie sind auf Seite 1von 213

ITCC 18 Parcels SERVICE OFFICES & VIRTUAL BUILDING WH01_04

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Volume 2 of 4


ISSUE FOR CONSTRCUTION PROJECT No. J09-07800 May 2011

ITCC 18 PARCELS SERVICE OFFICES & VIRTUAL BUILDING


(WH01_04) SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

VOLUME 1 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01050 01090 01300 01400 01500 01600 01700 FIELD ENGINEERING REFERENCE STANDARDS SUBMITTALS QUALITY CONTROL TEMPORARY FACILITIES MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PROJECT CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02020 02110 02200 02225 02285 02510 02515 02525 02580 02620 02668 02730 02736 02810 02900 CAVITY PROBING SITE CLEARING EARTHWORK TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING TERMITE CONTROL ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING UNIT PAVERS PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS PAVEMENT MARKING SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM SEWERAGE SYSTEM GRAY WATER TREATMENT PLANT IRRIGATION SYSTEM LANDSCAPING

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 05160 05500 05810
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

STRUCTURAL STEEL SPACE FRAMING METAL FABRICATIONS EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES

Index

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07100 07150 07200 07270 07500 07900 WATERPROOFING DAMPPROOFING BUILDING INSULATION FIRESTOPPING ROOFING SEALANTS

VOLUME 2 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 08120 08210 08328 08329 08331 08520 08620 08710 08800 08920 08925 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES SIDE COILING FIRE RATED SHUTTERS VERTICAL COILING FIRE RATED SHUTTERS OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ALUMINUM WINDOWS PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS FINISH HARDWARE GLASS AND GLAZING GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALL

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09200 09250 09310 09510 09547 09600 09660 09671 09680 09685 09841 09900 LATH AND PLASTER GYPSUM BOARD CERAMIC TILES ACOUSTICAL CEILING METAL CEILING STONEWORK RESILIENT FLOORING RESINOUS FLOORING CARPET CARPET TILES ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10165 10200 10260 10270 10431 10500 10800


ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

TOILET PARTITIONS LOUVERS AND GRILLES WALL AND COLUMN GUARDS ACCESS FLOOR SIGNS METAL LOCKERS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
B Index

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11410 TEA ROOM EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS N/A DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13150 WATER FEATURES DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14310 ESCALATOR

VOLUME 3 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 15100 15125 15140 15240 15250 15300 15320 15411 15420 15440 15453 15483 15485 15510 15780 15860 15890 15960 15961 15990 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS VALVES PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL MECHANICAL INSULATION FIRE PROTECTION CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (NOVEC-1230) WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM PLUMBING FIXTURES PUMPS FUEL OIL SYSTEM LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS SYSTEM (LPG) CHILLED WATER PIPING SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEM HVAC DUCTWORK BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) INTEGRATION SOFTWARE TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Index

VOLUME 4 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 16124 16126 16129 16146 16210 16231 16269 16342 16410 16415 16432 16441 16442 16452 16453 16461 16500 16610 16670 16715 16716 16720 16721 16770 16783 16785 16787 16950 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE LOW VOLTAGE CABLE AND WIRES BUSWAYS LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES (DALI) AUTOMATIC METER READING SYSTEM STANDBY PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES METALCLAD MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS TRANSFER SWITCHES RING MAIN UNIT SWITCHGEAR LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD PANEL BOARD GROUNDING GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS LIGHTING UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (UPS) LIGHTNING PROTECTION VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING IT CONVERGED NETWORK SYSTEM TELEPHONE SYSTEM FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PUBLIC ADDRESS & VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM SECURITY SYSTEM CAR PARKING SYSTEM MASTER ANTENNA TV SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TEST

END OF INDEX

APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (PLUMBING INPUT/OUTPUT LISTS) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HVAC INPUT/OUTPUT LISTS) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (ELECTRICAL INPUT/OUT LISTS) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CAR PARK GUIDANCE SYSTEM (ZONAL AND LEVEL CAR PARK COUNTING SYSTEM)

APPENDIX B:

APPENDIX C:

APPENDIX D:

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Index

SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Hollow metal doors and frames as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM A 36 ASTM A 164 ASTM A 307 Structural steel Electro-deposited coating of Zinc on Steel Carbon Steel externally and Internally threaded Standard Fasteners Steel sheets, Carbon, cold-Rolled Commercial Quality General Requirement for Steel (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process Sheet, Zinc-Coated

ASTM A 366 ASTM A 525

ASTM A 526

Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality Steel Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot-Rolled sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions

ASTM A 569

ASTM E 90

B.

FS - Federal Specification: FS-S-325 - Shield Expansion, Nail Expansion and Nail Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry)

C.

ANSI - American National Standard Institute: A.115 - Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware

D.

SDI - Steel Door Institute: SDI 100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames

E.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08100-1

Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiation that products comply with requirements. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of metal doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as shown on Drawings. Samples: 1. Submit 300 mm x 300 mm section sample of door showing internal construction, edge detail and reinforcement for butts for the Engineers review and approval. Submit 300 mm x 300 mm L-section sample of frame showing corner detail and 300 mm long samples of removable stop for the Engineers review and approval.

B.

C.

2.

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding, spreaders and paper wrappings to protect hollow metal items. Store doors and frames upright, in a protected dry covered area, at least 100 mm or more above ground or floor and at least 6 mm between individual pieces. Doors and frames are to have a metal tag with the door number thereon.

B.

C.

D. 1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit a written 1 year guarantee, starting from substantial handover of the project, for all items specified under this Section, signed by manufacturer and the contractor, against all the defects, including bowing, and twisting.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Unless otherwise specified, provide doors and frames complying with the Steel Door Institute Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames (ANSI/SDI- 100). Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide doors and frames complying with NFPA 80 or ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed by UL, FM or other testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
08100-2 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

C.

Manufacturer: Provide doors and frames from a single manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526 with ASTM A 252 G-60 zinc-coating, mill phosphatized. Reinforcement Steel: ASTM A 36. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard closed cell, waterproofed foamed in place polyurethane, completely filling the core. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated of 1.25 mm thick, galvanized sheet steel. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. Shop Applied Paint: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. Finish painting shall comply with the requirements of Section 09900 - PAINTING.

B.

C.

D. E.

F. G.

H.

2.2

FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate metal door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects (warp or buckle). Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. All fire rated doors shall be UL listed or equivalent and shall be labeled in factory indicating the fire rating. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold- rolled or hot-rolled steel. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as an integral part of the door construction or by addition of inverted steel channels.

B.

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08100-3

Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

E.

Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. Finish Hardware Preparation: 1. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site. Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware, Published by Door and Hardware Institute.

F.

2.

3.

G.

Shop Painting - Primer: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint.

2.

3.

2.3

PRESSED METAL FRAMES A. General: Provide continuous type pressed welded metal frames, including glazing stops and reinforcement of various profiles to suit conditions detailed on the drawings. Door frames shall be constructed of commercial quality cold-rolled sheet steel conforming to ASTM A 366 for interior doors and hot dip galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A 526, G90 for exterior door frames, treated after fabrication for optimum paint adhesion. Fire Rated Door Frames (Where required): Provide labeled fire rated door frames tested in accordance with NFPA 252 and UL 10(b) with rating as shown on drawings. Materials: Provide pressed metal frame of the following minimum thicknesses: 1. 2. Exterior Frames: 1.5 mm thick. Interior Frames: 1.2 mm thick for openings that are 1 m wide or less and 1.5 mm thick for openings wider than 1 m. Exterior frames shall be provided with a weather striping, 2 mm thick. Wall Anchors: Same thickness and material as frame. Frame Splines: Same thickness and material as frames.
08100-4 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

B.

C.

3. 4. 5.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

6.

Hinge Reinforcement: 250 x 40 x 5 mm, unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. Strike Reinforcement: 100 x 40 x 5 mm unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. Closer and Holder Reinforcement: 5 mm by the required length and width.

7.

8. D.

Frames: Provide frames that have joints die-mitered with integral tabs for reinforcement and interlocking of the jambs to head. Frames shall be knockdown or equivalent, with self aligning tabs and slots for securely locked corners. Construction: The finished work shall be strong and of rigid construction neat in appearance and free from warp, wave and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and true. Miters shall be well formed and in true alignment. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 rubber silencers on strike jamb of single-swing frames and 4 silencers on heads of double-swing frames. Anchors: 1. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, anchor frame in concrete and masonry walls by means of galvanized expansion shields and flat-head machine screws. Screw heads shall be counter-sunk in soffit of jamb. Machine screws shall be Phillips or Jackson-head type, 9 mm diameter by minimum 75 long of zinc plated or dichromated steel with 9 mm diameter by minimum 44 mm long malleable iron or steel expansion shield. Reinforce jamb at each expansion screw location with 5 mm by 38 mm wide steel fitting into inside of stop and welded to backbends. Anchors shall be located not more than 150 mm from top and bottom of each jamb with intermediate anchors spaced at a maximum of 650 mm on center. Anchors for plaster partitions with truss stud framing shall be Z-clip type, to be secured to studs and welded to back of frames above each hinge reinforcement and just below the top hinge reinforcement. Anchors on the strike side shall occur directly opposite to those on the hinge side. Provide at least 4 anchors for each jamb for frames up to 2.28 m in jamb height; 5 anchors up to 2.40 m; and one additional anchor for each 0.6 m fraction thereof over 2.4 m jamb height.

E.

F.

G.

2.

H.

Bottoms of frames shall have not less than 2.8 mm thick welded-on floor clips punched for two 6.4 mm expansion bolts or shot pins. Return bends of frames shall be flanged. Temporary channel or angle spreaders shall be tack-welded to bottom of frames to prevent distortion during shipment and storage and shall hold the frames in proper position until adjacent construction has been completed.

I.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08100-5

Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

2.4

HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Interior doors: Fabricate interior hollow metal doors from 1.2 mm thick commercial quality cold rolled stretcher-level sheet steel conforming to ASTM A 366, free from rust, scale, rated doors. Exterior doors: Fabricate exterior hollow metal doors from 1.2 mm thick hot dip galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A 526, G90. Provide exterior doors with spring tension type (aluminum or corrosion resisting steel) or integral elastomeric type (synthetic rubber, vinyl or neoprene) standard weather stripping at frames and/or doors in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as approved by the Engineer. Service Heavy-Duty Doors: Fabricate service doors using same sheet facing thickness as that for interior or exterior doors as per door location. Provide additional reinforcing stiffeners for the door construction. Fire Rated Door (Where required): Provide labeled fire rated door tested in accordance with NFPA 252 and UL 10(b) with rating as shown on drawings. Fire rated doors shall be provided with approved fire rated hardware conforming to NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Construction: 1. Doors are to have continuous internal reinforcing channels or z-shaped members, 1.5 mm thick steel, full height of door, spaced not more than 150 mm on center and spot welded to face sheets 75 mm on center. Doors with continuous truss inner core, full height and width, spot welded to face sheets at 75 mm on center both vertically and horizontally are also acceptable. Provide 0.9 mm thick stile channels and 1.9 mm thick horizontal stiffener channels at top and bottom of doors welded to face sheets. Core Construction: Provide doors with closed-cell waterproof foamed-inplace polyurethane core of 24 kg/m3 density. Polyurethane core doors shall have U Factor = 0.079, R Factor = 12.64, sound resistance (STC) = 31 and fire rating (where required) as shown on the drawings. Exposed joints shall be fully welded, filled and ground smooth. Interlocking joints or seams are not approved on faces or edges. Provide single swing doors with not more than 3 mm clearance at jambs and heads and not more than 6 mm clearance at meeting edges of pair of doors (3 mm on fire rated doors). Doors shall have a 3 mm in 50 mm bevel on the strike side.

B.

C.

D.

E.

2.

3.

4. 5. 6.

7. F.

Heads and jambs of doors shall be flush constructed unless otherwise shown to be rebated. Fire rated door pairs shall be provided with astragal intumescent protection strip unless otherwise shown.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08100-6

Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

G.

Undercutting: Undercut doors a maximum of 19 mm at bottom except toilet doors which shall be undercut a minimum of 30 mm, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement for finish hardware as follows: 1. Reinforcement for butts shall be not less than 5 mm thick by 230 mm long and 6 mm narrower than the thickness of the door. Reinforcing plates for closers, holders, stops and checks shall be not less than 5 mm thick and by template requirements as to length and width. Reinforcement for locks and escutcheons shall be not less than 1.9 mm thick steel, with spring leaf contacts for lock cases. Reinforcement for exit devices and mortised or surface applied hardware shall be not less than 2.6 mm thick and by template requirements as to length and width.

H.

2.

3.

4.

I.

Where indicated on Drawings, provide 10 mm thick tempered clear glass vision panels. Size shall be as shown on Drawings. Where indicated on Drawings, provide anodized aluminum door grille. Tolerances: provide door panels that are free from buckles, twists or other imperfections. Do not use panels having a buckle exceeding 1.5 mm, as determined by a straight edge applied to the face of the panel.

J.

2.5

LOUVERED DOOR( WHERE REQUIRED): A. Louvers and Frames: Provide manufacturers standard metal louvers suitable for the application indicated on Drawings: 1. Fabricated Metal: Formed metal stationary louvers and frames, 12 gauge (2.80 mm thick). Provide stiffening members where required. Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel type. Hardware: Provide all hardware complying with requirements of Section 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE. Bird Screen: 12.7 mm mesh x 1.60 mm diameter galvanized steel in folded frame.

2. 3.

4.

2.6

SHOP FINISH A. Carry out shop finishing of metal doors and frames as follows: 1. 2. Fill door edges with mineral filler to conceal seams. Chemically treat non galvanized, non bonderized metal surfaces with a phosphate compound to assure maximum paint adherence.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08100-7

Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

3.

Thoroughly clean all metal surfaces of all rust, scale, grease, rough spots and other foreign matter which may prevent proper paint adhesion. Apply dip or spray coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide zinc chromate or synthetic resin primer on all surfaces of frames and on all exposed surfaces of doors and panels. Exposed surfaces of metal shall receive a mineral filler baked on and sanded between coats followed by a coat of primer. Primer shall be baked on in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for developing maximum hardness and resistance to abrasion; paint dry film thickness not less than 1.25 mills. Primed surfaces shall be smooth and suitable to receive the finish coats.

4.

5. 2.7

FINAL FINISH A. Painted Doors: Provide a final painted finish conforming to Section 09900 PAINTING. Color shall be as approved by the Engineer.

2.8

HARDWARE PREPARATION A. General: Hollow metal doors and pressed metal frames shall be prepared at the manufacturer's plant for all hardware in accordance with templates furnished and shall be drilled and tapped to receive hardware as indicated on the hardware templates. Preparation shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A115. Mortised and concealed hardware: Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap for mortised and concealed hardware. Locations: Locate hardware as shown on the drawings and conform to standards established by the National Builders Hardware Association, and ANSI standards as applicable.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrates and the conditions under which hollow metal doors and frames shall be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

B.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. Placing Frames: Shall comply with provisions of SDI-105 (Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames), unless otherwise indicated. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100.
08100-8 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

B.

C.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

D. 3.3

Finish Hardware: Conform to Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE.

ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. Finish Painting: Conform to Section 09900 - PAINTING.

B.

C.

D.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08100-9

Hollow Metal Doors And Frames

SECTION 08120 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Aluminum doors and frames as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 79 Aluminum and aluminum alloys for building purposes - part 1: Rods/Bars, tubes and profiles Testing methods for aluminum and aluminum alloys products for building purposes part 1; Sheets, strips, bars and structural Methods of test for aluminum windows and doors Aluminum windows Aluminum doors

SASO 80

SASO 1032 SASO 1033 SASO 1034 B.

AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturer Association AAMA 101 AAMA 603.8 AAMA 605.2 Aluminum Prime windows and Sliding Glass Doors Pigmented Organic Coating on Extruded Aluminum. High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum Voluntary Specification for Pile Weather Stripping

AAMA 606.1 AAMA 607.1 AAMA 701.2 C.

AA - Aluminum Association Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

D.

ANSI - American National Standards Institute A134.1 Specification for Aluminum Prime windows

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08120-1

Aluminum Doors And Frames

E.

ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM B 136 ASTM B 137 ASTM B 209 ASTM B 211 ASTM B 221 Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum Weight of Coatings on Anodically Coated Aluminum Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods and Wire Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum with EddyCurrent Instrument Non-Rigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven From VinylCoated Glass fiber Yarn Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors under the Influence of Wind Loads Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Pressure Difference Loads Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference Loads Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use

ASTM B 244

ASTM D 2287

ASTM D 3656

ASTM E 283

ASTM E 330

ASTM E 331

ASTM E 547

ASTM F 468

F.

DIN - Deutsches Institut fuer Normung DIN 4108 DIN 18055 Heat Insulation in Buildings. Windows; Air Permeability of Joints, Water Tightness and Mechanical Strain.

G.

AWS - American Welding Society: D1.1 D1.2 Structural Welding Code, Steel. Structural Welding Code, Aluminum.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and


08120-2 Aluminum Doors And Frames

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

installation recommendations for components of aluminum doors and framing required for project, including data that products have been tested and comply with performance requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum doors and framing, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing Certification: Submit statement certified by registered structural engineer that systems including glass will withstand specified wind-loads. Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 300 mm long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 150 mm square sheets.

C.

D.

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver aluminum entrance material to the site in packages or containers; labeled for identification with the Manufacturer's name, brand and contents. Store aluminum entrance material in weather tight and dry storage facility. Protect from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during and after installation.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit 2 copies of written guarantee signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to replace aluminum door units that fail in material or workmanship within 2 years of date of substantial handing over.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Storefront and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual - AAMA. Performance and Testing: 1. Thermal Movement: Fabricate exterior components from Manufacturer's stock systems which have been designed to provide for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 48oC. Wind Loading: Fabricate exterior components from Manufacturer's stock systems which have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 to withstand at least the following loadings: a. b. 3. Uniform Pressure: 97.6 kg/m inward; 97.6 kg/m outward. Maximum Deflection: 1/175 of clear span any framing member.

B.

2.

Weather Resistance: Fabricate exterior components from Manufacturer's stock systems which have been tested to demonstrate permanent resistance to leakages as follows with test pressure differential of 10 percent of design loading (excluding operable door edges).

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08120-3

Aluminum Doors And Frames

a.

Air Infiltration: Tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 and shall have a minimum of 0.6 m3/min/m of crack. Water penetration and leakage shall not be allowed when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a water application rate 10 percent more than the design rate.

b.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Members: 1. Extrusions of Bars, Rods and Tubes: 6063-T6 Alloy conforming to ASTM B 221. Sheets and Plates: 5005-H14 alloy conforming to ASTM B 209. Doors and frames shall be manufacturer standard systems of extrusions not less than 2.2 mm thick suitable for double glazing.

2. 3.

B.

Fasteners: Aluminum, or non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by Manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners.

2. C. D.

Glazing Gasket: Manufacturer's standard vinyl glazing gasket. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high- strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 386. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC - Paint 12, compounded for 20 mil thickness per coat. Glass: Provide 24 mm double tempered glass. Glass and glazing materials shall be as specified in Section 08800 - GLAZING and as indicated on Drawings with all doors factory glazed. Hardware: Provide aluminum doors with Manufacturer's standard, factory-installed hardware conforming to the requirements of Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE.

E.

F.

G.

H.

2.2

FINISH A. Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard finish, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the following:
08120-4 Aluminum Doors And Frames

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

1.

Anodized Finish: Conform to AA C22A42; 22 micron thick; with shop-applied protective coating of clear acrylic lacquer or any coating in accordance with AAMA 602.2, 0.5 mil dry film thickness, over anodized finish. Color shall be as approved by the Engineer.

2.3

FABRICATION A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units including profile requirements, shall be as shown on Drawings. Variable dimensions shall be indicated, together with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, surface treatment, and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion. 1. Provide continuous steel reinforcing stiffening members within jambs and heads of all doorframes, except omit at jambs that are secured to adjacent fixed walls. Cut vertical reinforcing 50 mm less than mullion height and cut horizontal reinforcing 75 mm less than door head framing member. Securely fasten in a manner so that fasteners will not be visible in finished work. Fasten aluminum sections to steel reinforcing 150 mm from each end and intermediately at a maximum spacing of 600 mm on centers. Doorframes shall be free of vibration and distortion when doors are used.

B.

C.

D.

E.

2.

3.

4. F.

Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed strip; at other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strips mortised in other edge.

G. H.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08120-5

Aluminum Doors And Frames

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of aluminum doors and frames. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Anchor securely in place, separating aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials with bituminous coating. Set sill members and other members in bed of compound as shown, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown to provided weathertight construction. Expansion and Contraction: Allow for expansion and contraction due to temperature and building movement, and for practical building tolerances in connections to basic structure and in connections to work by others. At no place should window wall grid or framing impart any expansion or contraction forces on panels or glass. Hardware Preparation and Installation: Cut, reinforce, drill and tap aluminum work for application of finish hardware. Provide cover boxes in frames back of cutouts for hardware also install finish hardware in accordance with hardware Manufacturer's instructions and template requirements also use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Caulking: Seal joints between metal members and between metal and adjacent surfaces in accordance with the requirements of Section 07900 - SEALANTS. Refer to Section 08800 - GLAZING for installation of glass and glazing requirements.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

3.2

ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, without binding, and to provide tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping. Clean completed systems, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass and sealants. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances from aluminum surfaces. Remove protective coating when completion of adjoining works and construction activities no longer requires its retention. Institute protective measures and other precautions required to assure that aluminum doors and frames will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

B.

C.

D.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08120-6

Aluminum Doors And Frames

SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Wood doors and frames as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 815 SASO 1254 SASO 1256 B. Wooden Doors Methods of test for wooden windows and doors Specifications for timber

AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute: AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standard Guide Specification and Certification Program

C.

NWMA - National Woodwork Manufacturers Association: IS.1 - Industry Standard for Flush Doors

D.

WIC - Woodwork Institute of California: WIC Manual of Millwork

E.

ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials: ASTM E 152 - Fire Test of Door Assemblies

F.

NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association: LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates

G.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80 - Fire doors and Windows

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data for each type of wood door, including details of core and edge construction, unless otherwise indicated.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08210-1

Wood Doors And Frames

B.

Samples: Submit samples of door faces representing typical range of color and grain, strips of solid wood of species to be used for exposed edges, trim and other solid wood components.

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced ANSI standards and recommendations of door manufacturer. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for doors, frames and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings.

B.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit two copies of written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which shows photographing of core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of NWMA and AWI. The warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. Warranty shall be valid for a period of 1 year from the time of substantial completion.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD DOORS - GENERAL A. Doors shall be fabricated meeting the applicable requirements of the quality standard of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. All fire rated doors shall be UL listed or equivalent and shall be labeled in factory indicating the fire rating. Door Size: Width, height and design shall be as shown on Drawings. Door shall be 44 mm thick, unless otherwise required by manufacturer or indicated on Drawings. Tolerances: Size, squareness and warp tolerances shall be in accordance with NWMA 1.S.1. Hardware: Conform to Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE. Prefit and premachine wood doors at factory complying with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware schedule and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware.

B.

C.

D. E.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08210-2

Wood Doors And Frames

F.

Wood used for doors and frames shall be approved by Engineer as well as the door construction and design.

2.2

HOLLOW-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. General: 1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with following requirements: a. b. c. 2. AWI Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. Faces: Type as indicated on Drawings. Finish: Doors and frames shall have natural lacquer finish.

Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with following requirements: a. b. AWI Grade: Custom. Faces: Closed grain hardboard suitable for the intended application.

3. B.

Stiles and Rails: 44 mm Solid hardwood.

Hollow-Core Flush Doors: 1. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: a. Core: Corrugated expandable honeycomb core complying with ANSI Section 1300/NWWDA I.S.1. Construction: 7-Plies. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows: 1.) 2.) 3.) 250 mm bottom-rail blocking. 125-by-460 mm lock blocks. 46 mm midrail blocking.

b. c.

C.

Fire-rated Doors: 1. Construction: Manufacturer standard mineral-core construction as required to provide fire rating indicated. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors or fire ratings indicated and as necessary to eliminate need for through-bolting hardware.

2.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08210-3

Wood Doors And Frames

3.

Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and astragals for pairs of fire-rated doors, unless otherwise indicated.

4.

2.3

DOOR FRAMES A. Door Frame Type: As indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Solid Wood Frames: a. Type of Wood: Use rigid, square and uniform, best quality solid hardwood, architectural grade, clear all heart. Type of wood shall be as indicated on Drawings. Wood used shall be of a species listed as suitable for door frames and shall match with type specified for the related wood door. Frame Sizes, Rebates and Shapes: As shown on Drawings and as approved by Engineer. Frame rebates shall be 13 mm minimum depth for the internal doors and 19 mm for the external doors. Frames shall have wood architraves as shown on Drawings.

b.

c.

2.

Metal Door Frames: Manufacturer standard steel door frames complying with the requirements specified in Section 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES.

2.4

FABRICATION A. Openings: Where indicated, cut and trim openings through doors and panels complying with the applicable requirements of referenced standards for the kind of doors required. Exterior Doors: Treat exterior doors at factory with water repellent after manufacturing has been completed. Assembly: Assemble solid paneled doors and frames using be tongued and grooved connections with Type I waterproof adhesive. Adhesives: Assemble doors using Type I waterproof adhesives. Factory-Finishing: Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match approved sample.

B.

C.

D. E.

2.5

FINISH A. Doors and Frames Finish: As indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the following requirements:

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08210-4

Wood Doors And Frames

1.

Veneers: Natural lacquer finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Each door unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions including handling and storage recommendations. Doors shall be fitted to the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3. C. 3.18 mm on each vertical side and top. 13 mm on bottom, except when fitted hardware requires otherwise. Bevel non-rated doors 3.18 mm in 50 mm at lock and hinge edges.

B.

Install finish hardware to the templates provided. Fit to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for fit and uniform clearance at each edge. Restore finish on edges of shop-finished doors before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site.

D.

3.2

ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by the Engineer. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation as directed by the Engineer. Institute protective measures as recommended and accepted by door manufacturer to assure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08210-5

Wood Doors And Frames

SECTION 08328 SIDE COILING FIRE RATED SHUTTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work under this section as shown on the contract documents, specified herein, and as specified by the job conditions.

1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM A 366 ASTM A 525 Steel sheets, Carbon, cold-Rolled Commercial Quality General Requirement for Steel (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process Sheet, Zinc-Coated

ASTM A 526

Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality Steel Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot-Rolled sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions

ASTM A 569

ASTM E 90

B.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80 NFPA 101 Fire Doors and Windows Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Furnish submittals in accordance with the general requirements specified. Shop Drawing: Furnish shop drawings for architect's approval. Include elevations, sections, and details indicating dimensions, materials, finishes, conditions for anchorage and support of each door. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's technical literature describing the product to be used under this section. Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining all doors under this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the product.

B.

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08328-1

Side Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

E.

Product Test Reports: Submit copy of manufacturers actual burn test report clearly detailing the description of product, fire endurance method, test results and test conclusions of actual burn test as conducted and witnessed by UL, WH or FM.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire & Smoke Rated Assemblies: Provide all doors with fire and smoke resistance rating required to comply with governing regulations which are inspected, tested, listed and labeled by UL, WH or FM and complying with NFPA 80 for class of opening. Provide units tested and approved under UL 10B and UBC 7-2-1997 Part II. Provide testing agency label permanently fastened to each fire door assembly. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of federal, state and municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Testing: Provide documentation from a certified testing agency that the fire doors self-closing governor mechanism and fire door operator have been tested for a minimum of 50,000 cycles and 500 self closing trip tests. Manufacturer Requirements: Door manufacturer shall have been in the business of and have experience in manufacturing the type of product covered under this specification section as well as giving credible service for a minimum of five (5) years. Provide list of at least ten (10) completed projects which include the products covered under this section.

B.

C.

D.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's original packaging, labeled to show name, brand and type. Store materials in a protected dry location off the ground in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.6

WARRANTY A. Door Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects shall be repaired at no cost to the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Each unit shall consist of an interlocking slat curtain designed to travel in a horizontal plane, smoothly and without binding. Curtain shall be driven to the open and close position by a positive action sprocket drive, without the use of cables or counterbalance weights. 1. Curtain: Shall be fabricated of galvanized, interlocking, steel slats with an approximate cross section not less than 3" wide by 7/8" deep.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08328-2

Side Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

B.

Leading Edge: Curtain shall be furnished with a structural steel member of tubular design to provide stiffness, limit deflection and provide for a tight fitting closure. Receiving Edge: Shall be fabricated of a steel member with sufficient depth, designed to accept the leading edge and form a tight fitting closure when the door is the fully closed position. Swinging Emergency Egress Door: Incorporated within the curtain shall be a swinging type steel door designed and built as an integral part of the fire door's assembly. 1. 2. Door Frame: Shall be an all-steel unit type ASTM A366 hot rolled steel, 14 gauge with the same labeled fire resistance rating as specified for door. Door Assembly: Complete with door, hinge, and locking channel mechanism. 20 gauge stretcher leveled, electro galvanized and bonderized steel faces. Hardware: a. b. Fire Exit Device: Flush mounted integral type fire exit device on one face and with pull handle on opposite face of the swinging door. Closer: Shall be concealed type.

C.

D.

3.

E.

Head Track: Shall be of not less than 1/8" thick steel and shall be provided with an integral locking bar. The faying surface shall not be less than 38% of the flat plate area when the door is in the closed position. Locking bar shall lock and retain the coiling curtain in place. Floor Track (Optional): Shall be no greater than 1 deep and include integral removable stainless steel protective cover plates to allow for easy cleaning and proper maintenance. Perimeter Smoke Seals: Provide UL classified smoke seals internal to head track and at coiling curtain entry to coil box area. Counterbalance Assemblies: The fire door shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting blocks for attachment of curtain. Torsion springs shall be anchored to the same shaft and held in position by the same adjusting wheel accessible from outside the barrel assemblies. Coil Box: Shall be provided to entirely enclose coiled curtain and counterbalance assemblies. Coil box cover shall be of a rectangular design fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel. Electric Motor Operator: Fire door shall be provided with a compact power unit designed and built by the door manufacturer. Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal governor, magnetic operated brake and a fail-safe magnetic release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust and moisture. An efficient overload protection device, which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with the unit. Operator is to be housed in a NEMA type 1 enclosure.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08328-3

Side Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

1.

2.

3. 4. 5.

Motor: Shall be intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be 1/3hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size, which ever is greater. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt control circuit. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 80% efficiency minimum. Brake: Magnetically activated, integral within the operator's housing. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station marked open, close and stop.

K.

Self-Closing Mechanism: The fire door is to be designed with a centrifugal governor as an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall be activated by smoke detector or fire alarm. When activated the door is released and begins to close due to the captured torsion spring force. The speed of the door shall be governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal operating speed of the door, at a rate of not greater than 9" per second or less than 6" per second. The fire door shall self-close under its own power. Battery back-up systems to achieve self-closing are not acceptable. Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the door shall begin to self-close. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the fire door from closing for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed, the fire door shall self-close without the aid of electricity or battery back-up systems. Once power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the fire door shall reset themselves. Obstruction Sensing Device: The fire door shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the normal closing operation, the door shall stop, reverse and return to the open position. In the event the safety edge meets an obstruction during the self-closing operation, the door shall reverse and attempt to close three times. In the event that the obstruction has not been removed during the third attempt, the door shall come to rest on the obstruction and once the obstruction has been removed the fire door shall continue to the fully closed position. Easy Trip Test Feature: The fire door shall be designed so that it may be trip tested simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the door shall self-close. Once the fire door has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No ladders or tools shall be needed to reset the door or the time delay unit. Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt and chemically treat to provide for paint adhesion. Slats are to receive a prime coat finish of .2 mils of epoxy primer and .8 mils of polyester paint.

L.

M.

N.

O.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08328-4

Side Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and timely completion of work. Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any instance where dimensions vary. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job progress.

B.

C.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the door manufacturer. Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb, level, straight and true. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding operation. Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed. Test door closing sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Reset door after successful test.

B.

C.

D.

E.

3.3

PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation until accepted by owner. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way. Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and methods.

B. C.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08328-5

Side Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

SECTION 08330 VERTICAL COILING FIRE RATED SHUTTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vertical Coiling Fire & Smoke Rated Shutters as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM A 366 ASTM A 525 Steel sheets, Carbon, cold-Rolled Commercial Quality General Requirement for Steel (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process Sheet, Zinc-Coated

ASTM A 526

Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality Steel Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot-Rolled sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions

ASTM A 569

ASTM E 90

B.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 80 NFPA 101 Fire Doors and Windows Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiation that products comply with requirements. Shop Drawing: Furnish shop drawings for Engineer's approval. Include elevations, sections, and details indicating dimensions, materials, finishes, conditions for anchorage and support of each shutter. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's technical literature describing the product to be used under this section. 1. Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining all shutters under this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials

B.

C.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08329-1

Vertical Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver, store and handle hollow metal work in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding, spreaders and paper wrappings to protect hollow metal items. Store doors and frames upright, in a protected dry covered area, at least 100 mm or more above ground or floor and at least 6 mm between individual pieces. Doors and frames are to have a metal tag with the door number thereon.

B.

C.

D. 1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit a written 1 year guarantee, starting from substantial handover of the project, for all items specified under this Section, signed by manufacturer and the contractor, against all the defects, including bowing, and twisting.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire & Smoke Rated Assemblies: Provide all doors with fire and smoke resistance rating required to comply with governing regulations which are inspected, tested, listed and labeled by UL or WH and complying with NFPA 80 for class of opening. Provide units tested and approved under UL 10B and UBC 7-2-1997 Part II. Provide testing agency label permanently fastened to each fire shutter assembly. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of federal, state and municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Testing: Provide documentation from a certified testing agency that the fire shutter operator and self-closing governor mechanism has been tested for a minimum of 50,000 cycles and 500 trip tests. Manufacturer Requirements: Shutter manufacturer shall have been in the business of and have experience in manufacturing the type of product covered under this specification section as well as giving credible service for a minimum of five (5) years. Provide list of at least ten (10) completed projects which include the products covered under this section.

B.

C.

D.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VERTICAL COILING FIRE & SMOKE RATED SHUTTERS A. General: Vertical coiling fire and smoke rated shutters shall be the as manufactured by McKeon Door Company; type as selected by Engineer. Provide Vertical coiling fire and smoke rated shutters for locations as shown on drawings, size as required.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08329-2

Vertical Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

B.

General: Each unit shall consist of an interlocking slat curtain designed to travel in a Vertical plane, smoothly and without binding. Curtain shall be driven to the open and close position by a positive action sprocket drive, engaging the slat interlocks, without the use of cables or counterbalance weights. 1. Curtain: Shall be fabricated of cold rolled galvanized steel, interlocking slats of McKeon F3 design, with an approximate cross section not less than 3" wide by 7/8" deep. Each end of each slat shall be equipped with rollwindlocks. Roll-windlocks shall be secured to slats with monobolts. Rollwindlocks shall be shouldered where bearing on slats to provide automatic alignment and shall be so contoured to insure minimum frictional losses.

C.

Leading Edge: Curtain shall be furnished of a structural steel member of tubular design to provide stiffness, limit deflection and provide for a tight fitting closure. Tracks: Shall be of not less than 1/8 thick steel and shall be provided with an integral locking bar. The faying surface shall not be less than 38% of the flat plate area of the continuous roll-windlocks when the shutter is in the closed position. Locking bar shall lock the curtain in place. Perimeter Smoke Seals: Provide UL classified brush smoke seals at tracks and at coiling curtain entry to coil box area. Counterbalance Assemblies: The fire shutter shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Torsion springs shall be anchored to the same shaft and held in position by the same adjusting wheel accessible from outside the barrel assemblies. Coil Box: Shall be provided to entirely enclose coiled curtain and counterbalance assemblies. Coil box cover shall be of a rectangular design fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel. Electric Motor Operator: Each shutter shall be provided with a compact power unit designed and built by the shutter manufacturer. Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal governor, spring-set solenoid-operated brake and a fail-safe magnetic release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust, and moisture. Operator is to be NEMA type 1 enclosure. An efficient overload protection device, which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with the unit. 1. Motor: Shall be totally enclosed, intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size which ever is greater. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 24 volt control circuit. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 90% efficiency minimum, 77:1 reduction.
08329-3 Vertical Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

2.

3.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

4.

Brake: Double shoe type, continuous duty, solenoid activated, integral within the operators housing. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station marked open, close and stop.

5.

I.

Self-Closing Mechanism: The fire shutter shall be designed with a centrifugal governor as an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall be triggered by smoke detector or fire alarm. When triggered the shutter is released and begins to close due to the captured torsion spring force. The speed of the shutter shall be governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal operating speed of the shutter, at a rate of not greater than 6" per second or less than 3" per second. The fire shutter shall selfclose under its own power. Battery back-up systems to achieve self-closing are not acceptable. Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the shutter shall begin to self-close. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the fire shutter from closing for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed, the fire shutter shall self-close without the aid of electricity or battery back-up systems. Once power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the fire shutter shall reset themselves, and the shutter shall automatically power it-self back to the fully open position. Safety Edge: Each fire shutter shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the closing operation, the shutter shall stop, reverse and return to the open position. Easy Trip Test Feature: Each fire shutter shall be designed so that it may be triptested simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the shutter shall self-close without the aid or electricity or battery back-up systems. Once the fire shutter has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset and power it-self back to the fully open position simply by turning the power back on. No ladders or tools shall be needed to reset the shutter or the time delay unit. Painting: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt and chemically treat to provide for paint adhesion. Slats are to receive a prime coat of .2 mils of Urethane primer and .6 mils of Polyester paint.

J.

K.

L.

M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and timely completion of work.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08329-4

Vertical Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

B.

Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any instance where dimensions vary. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job progress.

C.

D.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the shutter manufacturer. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way. Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and methods.

B. C.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08329-5

Vertical Coiling Fire Rated Shutters

SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulated overhead coiling doors and counter type roll-up door, operating hardware, manual and electric operation. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to door operator to control station.

B. 1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and materials ASTM A 446 Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality General Requirement for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-dip Process, Commercial Quality

ASTM A 525

ASTM A 526

B.

NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NEMA 250 NEMA ICS 2 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) Standards for Assemblies Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and

NEMA MG1 C.

Motors and Generators

UL - Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. UL 325 Grille, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems

1.3

0SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrically operated unit with overhead counter balance device and manual override in case of power failure.

1.4

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design door assembly to withstand wind/suction load of 20 psf, without undue deflection or damage to door or assembly components. Doors shall be fire-rated in accordance with the ratings specified on Drawings. Electrical Components: UL listed.
08331-1 Overhead Coiling Doors

B. C.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

1.5

SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical equipment, and wiring. Samples: Submit 2 door slats, 600 mm long in size illustrating shape, color and finish texture. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures. Provide certificate of compliance from indicating approval of door and operating hardware assembly.

B.

C.

D.

E.

1.6

MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit maintenance data indicating lubrication requirements and frequency, periodic adjustments required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Insulated Roll-Up Overhead Doors: 1. Construction: Enclosed box construction, double-walled section manufactured from 18 gauge galvanized steel sheet filled with polystyrene or mineral wool insulation with the following technical features: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. Sound Transmission Class: Fire Rating: Curtain weight: U value: 29 dB. one hour. 29 kg/m . 2.7 Kcal/M2.
2

Slats: 100 mm x 20 mm thick flat lath section. Bottom Rail Weather Seal: Manufacturers standard inverted T section in galvanized steel bottom rail 65 mm high, 75 mm wide cold rolled from 2mm thick galvanized steel strip with compressible rubber (EPDM or solid neoprene) weather seal. Fire Rating: One hour.

4. B.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Hardware: Provide manufacturer standard locking devices, including handles as required for proper door operation.
08331-2 Overhead Coiling Doors

2.2

ELECTRIC OPERATOR A. Electric Operator: ANSI/UL 325, side or center mounted and in accordance with the following: 1. 2. Motor Enclosure: Motor Rating: NEMA MG1, TEFC. As recommended by door manufacturer to match door size and weight. NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 250, type as recommended by door

3.

Motor Controller:

4.

Controller Enclosure: NEMA manufacturer. Door Speed: Brake:

5. 6.

300 mm/s Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.

B.

Control Station: Standard 3 button (Open-Close-Stop) control for each operator; 24 volt circuit; surface mounted; safety edge to reverse; pull cord or radio control will open or close door; open override feature, pull cord, radio control, open button, and safety edge will reverse door to open position when door is closing. Door operator rating shall be 1/3 HP. Manual Operator: Provide manufacturer standard, manual emergency door operators.

C.

2.3

FINISHES A. Curtain Slats: Pre-coated paint finish, color as selected by the Engineer from manufacturers standard lines of finishes. Steel Guides and Hood Enclosure: Prime paint and prepare for paint finish complying with requirements of Section 09900 - PAINTING.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.

INSTALLATION A. B. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08331-3

Overhead Coiling Doors

C.

Securely brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. Installation of Electrical Service: Comply with the requirements of Section 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components and from fire alarm system to door operator. Apply sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as required by Section 07900 - SEALANTS. Install perimeter trim and closures.

D.

E.

F.

G. 3.3

ERECTION TOLERANCES A. B. C. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. Maximum Variation from Plumb: Maximum Variation from Level: Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: 1.5 mm. 1.5 mm. Plus or minus 3 mm per 3 m straight edge.

3.4

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. B. C. Adjust shutter, hardware and operating assemblies. Clean door and components. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08331-4

Overhead Coiling Doors

SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2. Aluminum windows as shown on Drawings and specified herein.

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 79 Aluminum and aluminum alloys products for architectural application Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural sections. Testing methods for aluminum and aluminum alloys products for building purposes Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural section. Methods of test for aluminum windows and doors. Aluminum windows.

SASO 80

SASO 1032 SASO 1033 B.

AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturer Association AAMA 101 AAMA 603.8 AAMA 605.2 Aluminum Prime windows and Sliding Glass Doors Pigmented Organic Coating on Extruded Aluminum High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum Voluntary Specification for Pile Weather Stripping

AAMA 606.1 AAMA 607.1 AAMA 701.2 C.

AA - Aluminum Association Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

D.

ANSI - American National Standards Institute: A134.1 Specification for Aluminum Prime windows.

E.

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM B 136 Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum
08520-1 Aluminum Windows

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

ASTM B 137 ASTM B 209 ASTM B 211 ASTM B 221 ASTM B 244

Weight of Coatings on Anodically Coated Aluminum Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bars, Rods and Wire Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum with Eddy-Current Instrument Non-Rigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds. Insect Screening and Louver Cloth Woven From Vinyl-Coated Glass fiber Yarn Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under the Influence of Wind Loads. Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Pressure Difference Loads Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference Loads Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use

ASTM D 2287

ASTM D 3656

ASTM E 283

ASTM E 330

ASTM E 331

ASTM E 547

ASTM F 468 F.

DIN - Deutsches Institut fuer Normung DIN 4108 DIN 18055 Heat Insulation in Buildings Windows; Air Permeability of Joints, Water Tightness and Mechanical Strain

G.

AWS - American Welding Society: D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel D1.2 - Structural Welding Code, Aluminum

1.3.

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation recommendations for components of aluminum windows required for project, including data that products have been tested and comply with performance requirements.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08520-2

Aluminum Windows

B.

Certification: Submit statement certified by registered Structural engineer that systems including glass will withstand specified wind-loads. Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 300 mm long sections of extrusions or formed shapes.

C.

1.4.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver aluminum window to site in packages or containers; labeled for identification with the manufacturer's name, brand and contents. Store aluminum window material in weather tight and dry storage facility. Protect from damage from handling, weather and construction operations before, during and after installation.

1.5.

WARRANTY A. Submit 2 copies of written guarantee signed by the manufacturer, installer and contractor, agreeing to replace aluminum window units which fail in material or workmanship within 1 year of date of substantial handing over.

1.6.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Storefront and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual - AAMA. General: Provide aluminum window units that comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding stock systems according to test methods indicated. Type of windows shall be as shown on the drawings. Testing: Test each type and size of required window unit through a recognized independent testing laboratory or agency approved by Owners Representative, in accordance with ASTM E 330 for structural performance, ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 547 for water penetration. Provide certified test results. Sizes of test units for the air infiltration, water resistance, and structural performance shall conform to the AAMA Guide Specification GS-001 Chart A requirements. Tested units shall be glazed, completely assembled, and constructed in accordance with requirements indicated. Perform tests on units with window sash and ventilators closed and locked. Materials and workmanship used in test units shall be identical to those proposed for the project. Use of nonrepresentative measures or techniques is prohibited. Design Requirements: Comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for type, grade and performance class of window units required. 1. In addition to AAMA design standards, component parts and completed window assemblies shall be designed, fabricated and installed to withstand design pressure of minimum 98 kg/m, for wind loads normal to wall, acting both inward and outward.

B.

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08520-3

Aluminum Windows

2.

Uniform Load Deflection: No window member (glazed) shall deflect more than 1/175 of its span at the specified design load when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 at a static air pressure difference of at least 98 kg/m, with ventilators closed and locked and the pressure applied first on one side of the unit then on the other. Air infiltration rate of aluminum windows shall not be more than 0.30 cfm per ft of operable sash joint for inward test pressure of 30 kg/m, when tested in accordance ASTM E 283. Water Penetration: There shall be no water penetration, as defined in ASTM E 331, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure of 39 kg/m. Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be of "thermal-break construction," provide units that have been tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503.1 showing a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 45. Forced-Entry Resistance: Provide window units having a Performance Level 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM F 588.

3.

4.

5.

6.

E.

Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Engage on experienced manufacturer and installer who has minimum 5 years experience of manufacturing and installing aluminum windows similar in design and finish to those required for the project and which has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Manufacturer and installer shall be subject to approval of Owners Representative. Single Source Responsibility: Provide aluminum window units from one source and produced by a single manufacturer. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.

F.

G.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 GENERAL: Window types shall be as shown on Drawings. MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. General: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard windows complete with members, hardware, weatherstripping, glazing beads, setting blocks, and glazing wedges. Exterior windows and sliders shall have dead locks. Sliders shall have stainless steel V-channel over the slider track with nylon roller.

2.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08520-4

Aluminum Windows

3.

Operable exterior sections of sliding windows shall have aluminum insect screens.

B.

Aluminum members: 1. 2. 3. Extrusions of bars, rods and tubes: 6063-T6 alloy conforming to ASTM B 221. Sheets and plates: 5005-H14 alloy conforming to ASTM B 209. Window frames and sashes shall be manufacturer standard systems of extrusions not less than 2.2 mm thick.

C.

Fasteners: Aluminum, or non-magnetic stainless steel, or a non-corrosive material, compatible with the aluminum components and warranted by manufacturer. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners.

2. D.

Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer standard high-strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 386. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 386. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC - Paint 12, compounded for 20 mil thickness per coat. Sealants: Aluminum frames shall be sealed using a sealant of a type conforming to Section 07900 - SEALANTS, and a color matching with the aluminum profiles. Glass: Conform to Section 08800 - GLAZING. Type of glazing shall be as shown on the Drawings. Weatherstripping: For horizontal sliding or double-wing window units provide sliding type woven pile weatherstripping of wood, polypropylene or nylon pile and resinimpregnated backing fabric, and aluminum backing strip complying with AAMA 701.2. For other types of windows provide compression-type weatherstripping, compressible molded expanded EPDM or neoprene weatherstripping gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 509. Glazing Gasket: Manufacturer's standard vinyl glazing gasket. Hardware: Provide manufacturers standard hardware fabricated from aluminum or stainless steel compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform and function as intended.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J. K.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08520-5

Aluminum Windows

2.3

FINISHES A. Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard finish, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the following: 1. Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard anodized finish conforming to AA C22A42; 22 micron thick; with shop-applied protective coating of clear acrylic lacquer or any coating in accordance with AAMA 602.2, 0.5 mil dry film thickness, over anodized finish. Color shall be as approved by the Engineer.

2.4

FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with indicated standards and are reglazable without dismantling of sash framing, except to extent more specific or more stringent requirements are indicated. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units, and prepare sash for glazing except where pre-glazing at factory is indicated. Fabrication and installation of aluminum windows shall be executed by an approved specialized firm having at least 5 years experience of successfully completed projects. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for window units and profile requirements are shown on the drawings. Details, where shown, are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. It is intended that similar details by other manufacturers shall be acceptable, provided they comply with size requirements, minimum/maximum profile requirements and performance standards as shown or specified. Pre-glazed Fabrication: Pre-glaze window units at factory where possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with requirements of Section 08800 GLAZING in addition to requirements of ANSI/AAMA 302.9. Provide weep-holes and internal passages to drain infiltrating water and condensation to exterior. Weatherstripping: Provide compression-type weather-stripping at perimeter of each operating sash where sliding-type is not appropriate. Provide sliding-type weatherstripping at all locations where sash rails slide horizontally or vertically along frame of units. Provide mullions and cover plates as shown matching window units, and complete with anchors for support and installation. Allow for erection, tolerances and provide for movements of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A.


ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Window openings shall conform to dimensions and tolerances shown on the drawings.
08520-6 Aluminum Windows

B.

Examine substrates, adjoining construction, and the conditions under which work is to be installed. Installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units and other components. Units shall be set plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames. Frames shall be anchored solidly to surrounding construction to prevent distortion or misalignment. Apply protective coating to separate aluminum from galvanically incompatible materials, including concrete and steel casting as recommended by aluminum manufacturer.

B. C.

D.

3.3

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of installation of aluminum windows, clean exposed metal and glass surfaces of excess sealants, dirt and other substances. Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Lubricate hardware. Protect the installed work until substantial completion and replace all damaged work as required by the Engineer.

B.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08520-7

Aluminum Windows

SECTION 08620 PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Plastic unit skylights with integral insulated curb.

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 79 Aluminum and aluminum alloys products for architectural application Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural sections. Testing methods for aluminum and aluminum alloys products for building purposes Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural sections.

SASO 80

B.

AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturer Association AAMA-603.8 AAMA-605.2 Pigmented Organic Coating on Extruded Aluminum. High Performance Organic Extrusions and Panels Coatings on Architectural

AAMA-606.1 AAMA-607.1 C.

Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum

ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials: ASTM B 209 ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants Test Method for Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating materials Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in Horizontal Position Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning o
08620-2 Plastic Unit Skylights

ASTM C 920 ASTM D 256

ASTM D 635

ASTM D 1929 ASTM 2843


ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Decomposition of Plastics ASTM D 4586 ASTM D 4802 Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free Specifications for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet

D.

NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual: For Architectural and Metal Products

F.

NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual

G.

SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC Paint System # 12: Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film)

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide configurations, dimensions of individual components, elevations, plans, sections, finishes, profile, including characteristics of light admitted, transparency, and insulation value of unit. Shop Drawings: Indicating fabrication and installation of skylights, including, locations, fastening methods, construction and installation details. Samples for initial selection purposes showing manufacturer's full range of color available for each type of skylight glazing, retainers, frame and curb. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

B.

C.

D. 1.4

WARRANTY A. Provide 5 years manufacturer's warranty including coverage of weather and water tightness of skylight assembly and seal with roofing system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy 3005-H25 and temper as required to suit forming operations and finish requirements. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper as required to suit forming operations and finish requirements. Plastic Sheets: Monolithic, formable, transparent or tinted with good weather and impact resistance.

B.

C.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08620-3

Plastic Unit Skylights

1.

Polycarbonate: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by the extrusion process, UV-resistant, with average impact strength of 638 to 850J/m of width when tested according to ASTM D 256.

D.

Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, or non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint #12, solvent type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulphur and contains no asbestos fibers, compounded for 0.4 mm dry film thickness per coating. Mastic Sealant: Pollyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-shrinking, non-drying, nonmigrating sealant. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer and compatible with joint surfaces. ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25 and Uses NT, G,A (and as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non-asbestos-fibrated, asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.

E.

F.

G.

H.

2.2

PLASTIC SKYLIGHT UNITS A. General: Factory-assembled unit consisting of plastic glazing, extruded aluminum glazing retainer, gasketing, inner frame designed to mount on separate curb and self-contained flashing. Condensation Control: Fabricated skylight units with integral internal gutters and non-clogging weeps to collect and dispose condensation. Thermal Break: Fabricated skylight units with thermal barrier separating interior metal frame from materials exposed to outside temperature. Shape and Size: Pyramidal unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable extruded monolithic polycarbonate sheets, UV resistant, burglar resistance rated per UL 972 with average impact strength of 638 to 850 J/m of width when tested per ASTM D 256, Test Method A (Izod). 1. Sheet Thickness: Provide double glazed plastic units with sheet thickness suitable for at least for 1.9 kPa positive (external) loading and 0.95 kPa negative pressure or uplift (internal) or as recommended by skylight manufacturer for unit size and shape. Profile: Double-Glazing Profile Pyramid. a. b. Inner Glazing Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range. Outer Glazing Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.
08620-4 Plastic Unit Skylights

B.

C.

D. E.

2.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

3.

Glazing Gasket: neoprene gasket.

Manufacturer standard glazing system of EPDM or

2.3

FABRICATION A. B. C. D. Fabricate free of visual distortion and defects. Provide for removal of condensation. Provide weathertight assembly. Fabricate to drain water entering joints, or migrating moisture occurring within unit, to exterior.

2.4

FACTORY FINISHING A. Aluminum: Color-anodized finish, as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer standard product range of finishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashing. Apply bituminous paint on aluminum surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. Provide weathertight installation.

D.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08620-5

Plastic Unit Skylights

SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. B. Door hardware as shown on Drawings and as specified herein. Verify the accuracy of quantities, sizes, finish and proper hardware to be provided. Determine all details related to door locksets functions. Hardware not specifically listed for a particular opening shall be provided under this Section and shall be the same as hardware types and quality for similar opening elsewhere in the building or as directed by the Engineer.

1.2.

REFERENCES A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute A156.1 - Butts and Hinges (BHMA 101) A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim (BHMA 601) A156.3 - Exit Devices (BHMA 701) A156.4 - Door Control Closers (BHMA 301) A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim (BHMA 1001) A156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches (BHMA 621) A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware (BHMA 1201) A156.18 - Materials and Finishes (BHMA 1301) B. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures

C.

IBC - International Building Code (IBC 2003) All applicable portions of IBC 2003

D.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. All applicable portions

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08710-1

Door Hardware

1.3.

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each item of hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with the requirements and include installation and maintenance of operating parts and finish instructions. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule including coordination with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, functions and finish of hardware. Submit separate detailed schedule showing the implementation of the Owner's final instruction on the keying of locks. Samples: Prior to submittal of hardware schedule and ordering of hardware, submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description for the approval of the Engineer.

B.

C.

1.4.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver items of hardware to job site in Manufacturer's original new packing, complete with necessary appurtenances including screws, keys and instructions. Mark each individual container with manufacturer's name and catalog number as they appear in hardware schedule. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

B.

1.5.

WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by Manufacturer and Contractor, agreeing to replace hardware items which fail in material or workmanship within 1 year of the date of substantial handing over.

1.6.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Obtain each type of hardware from a single manufacturer to the greatest possible extent. Supplier: A recognized architectural hardware supplier with warehousing facilities, and has been providing hardware for similar Projects for a period of not less than 2 years and who has, or will employ an experienced architectural hardware consultant to be available, at reasonable times during work, for consultation about Project's hardware requirements to the Engineer as well as Contractor.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A.


ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

General:
08710-2 Door Hardware

1.

Hardware shall be of Grade 1, heavy-duty type, solid metal, entirely free from imperfections in manufacture and finish and shall be UL Listed or equivalent. Finish of Hardware: Conform to BHMA coding. Finish shall be as shown on Drawings and in accordance with the following: a. Polished brass - BMHA finish Code No. 605, bright polished brass, clear coated (lacquered). Stainless steel - Conform to the BHMA Code 630; satin finish, complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18.

2.

b.

3. 4.

Provide matching finish for different components of the same hardware set. Provide hardware items of proper design for the use of doors and frames of thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated and as necessary for proper installation and operation. Fire rated doors shall be provided with approved fire rated hardware conforming to NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.

5.

B.

Door Handles: Lever handles shall be rounded, spring loaded on both sides and have safety feature return ends. Finish shall be stainless steel, conforming to BHMA Code 630. Fasteners: Fabricated of stainless steel, head finish matching with the surface of hardware item. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed or partially exposed screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including - prepared for paint - in surfaces to receive painted finish. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Furnish wood screws for all connections to wood doors, and machine screws for all connections to metal parts and assemblies.

C.

2.2.

Hinges: A. Butt hinges shall meet the requirements of ANSI A156.1 (BHMA 101). Hinges shall bear mark or trademark of manufacturer. Size of hinge shall be 100 x 100 mm, unless indicated otherwise on hardware schedule. Full mortise five knuckle hinges shall have flat button tips, square cornered and shall have stainless steel pins, nonremovable pins for external doors. Number of hinges for each door type shall be in accordance with Hardware Schedule shown on Drawings.

1.

Hinges shall have minimum leave thickness 3.4 for exterior and vestibule door as well as doors over 1000 mm wide, and 3.7 mm leave thickness for other doors of standard construction. Full mortise hinges with heavy duty ball bearing shall be used for external doors and full mortise hinges with standard
08710-3 Door Hardware

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

ball bearing shall be for internal doors. 2. 3. B. Single acting spring hinges shall be as approved by the Engineer. Double acting spring hinges shall be as approved by the Engineer.

Locksets and Latchsets: Conforming to ANSI A156.13 (BHMA 621), UL listed, shall be heavy duty series, Operational Grade 1, Security Grade 2, mortise and cylinder type as required, functions as shown on drawings. All locks shall be construction grandmasterkeyed. 1. Lock Cylinders: Models selected shall conform to ANSI A156.5 (BHMA 1001), having a minimum of 6 pin tumblers. Lock cylinders be interchangeable cores with their keys. Lock cylinders shall be permanently inscribed with a number that identifies the key-change combination to the building lock manufacturer. Only manufacturer's name or trademark shall be visible after installation. Locksets and Latchsets: As shown on drawings, cylindrical or mortise types providing the lock functions as shown on drawings, minimum backset 70 mm with stainless steel, polished lever/knob handle and escutcheons, minimum thickness 1.25 mm. Knobs shall be spherical design. Latchbolt throw shall be 16 mm minimum except when lockset is used on pairs of doors where latchbolt throw minimum is 19 mm. For locksets with deadbolt function, minimum throw of deadbolt shall be 25 mm. Strikes: Shall be wrought box type, lips curved and returned to door frame or frame trim with minimum projection necessary for protection of frame and trim.

2.

3.

C.

Exit Devices (Panic Bolt): Exit devices shall meet the requirements of ANSI A156.3, Grade 1, UL listed. Concealed vertical rod devices shall be provided. Flush Bolt: Type required shall be as indicated on the Hardware Schedule. Flush bolt location, aligned in edge of door with operating mechanism of top bolt centered 300 mm from top of door and bottom bolt centered 300 mm above bottom of door. For doors over 2100 mm in height bolt height shall not exceed 1800 mm from the floor. 1. 2. Automatic flush bolts shall be as approved by the Engineer. Constant latch flush bolts shall be as approved by the Engineer.

D.

E.

Overhead Door Closers: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 2, overhead surface-mounted type, and function as required or as recommended by manufacturer. Sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 70 degrees, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 75 mm from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. Closer shall have automatic hold-open feature. 1. 2. General overhead door closers shall be as approved by the Engineer. Overhead door closers for Fire Exit Doors shall be as approved by the Engineer.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08710-4

Door Hardware

F.

Push Plates: Size shall be as indicated on Drawings or approved by the Engineer and shall conform to ANSI A156.6 satin finish stainless steel. Provide plates with cutouts for lock cylinders, where required. Thresholds: Provide units not less than 100 mm wide complying with ANSI A156.6, extruded aluminum with minimum 3 mm wall thickness. Height of threshold shall conform to door cut. Door Stops: Conform to ANSI A156.16 (BHMA 1201) 1. 2. Grade 1.

G.

H.

Wall-mounted door stops shall be as approved by the Engineer. Wall-mounted door stops with holder shall be as approved (Cast stop and holder) by the Engineer. Floor-mounted door stops shall be approved (Cast stop) by the Engineer. Floor-mounted door stops with holder shall be as approved by (Cast stop and holder) the Engineer.

3. 4.

I.

Door Silencers: Provide silencers for metal door frames in accordance with BHMA Grade 1 (BHMA A156.16); neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 13 mm; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

2.2.

KEYS AND KEYING A. Keys shall be permanently inscribed with a number that identifies the cylinder or lock manufacturer and the key symbol. Keys shall be appropriately tagged. Keys shall be provided as follows: B. Grandmaster key to work on all locks of all buildings on site. Master key for each building. Sub-Master key for each floor of building. Sub-Master key for service areas of each building. Construction grandmaster key.

Number of keys shall be provided as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Each Lock: 3 keys. Grandmaster key: 6 grandmaster keys. Master-key: 6 master keys for each master key group. Sub-Master-key: 6 sub-master keys for each key group. Construction grandmaster key: 6 Nos.

C.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Change-key Blanks: 50 to fit keyway of cylinders for all locks.


08710-5 Door Hardware

D.

Keying shall be in sets and sub-sets. Keys of any one set or subset shall not operate of any other set unless scheduled otherwise. Keys shall be packaged with core cylinders in sealed containers. Key Control System: BHMA Grade 1 system, including key-holding hooks, labels, three sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. Contain system in metal cabinet with bakedenamel finish. Wall-Mounted Cabinet shall be with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock. Cabinet shall be able to hold keys for 150 percent of the number of locks. Furnish four sets of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each keyholding hook.

E.

2.3.

HARDWARE SCHEDULE (Refer to Drawings)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE A. General: Finish hardware items shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner according to the manufacturer's written recommendations, unless otherwise specified herein. Fasteners: Suitable fastening devices shall be provided for installation of hardware items. Installation shall provide against shock and tampering. Exposed fastenings shall match contiguous materials and finish of hardware items and shall be inconspicuous. Where practicable finish flush with surrounding surfaces and fastenings shall be of materials compatible with contacting hardware surfaces. Final Adjustment: Immediately upon completion and acceptance of the project, make final adjustments in the finish hardware installation; remove construction core from cylinders and then open sealed containers in the presence of the Engineer and install proper core in cylinders, demonstrate to the Engineer that each item is in perfect working condition; perform intended function and that tagged keys operate respective locks. Correct items of hardware not acceptable to the Engineer by proper adjustment or replacement at no cost to the Owner. Deliver tagged keys upon acceptance of each core cylinder installation. Protection: Protect installed hardware from paint, stains, and blemishes until acceptance of the work. Location of Hardware on Hinged Doors: Locate in accordance with the recommended locations for Builder's Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames as published by the Door and Hardware Institute.

B.

C.

D.

E.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08710-6

Door Hardware

SECTION 08800 GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. 1.2. Glazing for doors and glazed openings. Mirrors. Glazing materials and accessories.

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM C 920 ASTM C 1036 ASTM C 1048 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Flat Glass Heat-Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass Laminated Architectural Glass Sealed Insulating Glass Units Security Glazing Materials and Systems

ASTM C 1172 ASTM E 774 ASTM F 1233 B.

FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association Glazing Sealing Systems Manual Glazing Manual

C.

FS - Federal Specifications DD-G-451 Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and other Uses) Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered) Mirrors, Plate, Glass, Framed

DD-G-1403

DD-M-411 D.

ANSI - American National Standards Institute, Inc. Z97.1 Performance Specification and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08800-1

Glazing

E.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association Glazing Manual

1.3.

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data for glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. Samples: Submit 300 mm x 300 mm samples of each type of glass to be used. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturer attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for the project comply with requirements.

B. C.

1.4.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's written directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes, including high altitude limitations for insulating glass.

1.5.

WARRANTY A. Submit a written guarantee signed by Manufacturer and Installer of glazing for a period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The Guarantee shall cover the replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

1.6.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) - Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or other referenced standards. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated, provide type of products which comply with ANSI Z97.1. Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of unit with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organizations.

B.

C.

1.7.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other cause. Install sealant at ambient and substrate temperatures permitted by sealant
08800-2 Glazing

B.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. GLASS PRODUCTS - GENERAL A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass, kind HS (heatstrengthened) and kind FT (fully tempered), complying with the requirements of ASTM C 1048, including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type, quality, class, and if applicable, form, finish, and pattern. Laminated Glass: Two panes of annealed glass bonded with an interlayer material for use in building glazing, all complying with the requirements of ASTM C 1172. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than 6 mm thick for windows and 12 mm for doors (single glazing).

B.

C.

D.

2.2.

GLASS A. Tempered Float Glass: 1. Grade B (fully tempered), Style I (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), quality q (glazing select), 12 mm thick for partitions and for fully glazed doors, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Provide tempered float glass for doors indicated on Drawings to have single glazing.

2.

B.

Sealed Insulated Glass Units: 1. Provide pre-assembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant. Units shall have a UValue of 2.8 W/m2/K and an overall Shading Coefficient of 0.21. Spacer material shall be manufacturer's standard aluminum or stainless steel. Desiccant shall be either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. Thickness as shown on drawings. Provide sealed insulating glass units for entrance doors indicated on Drawings to have double-glazing. Provide tempered reflective glass outside and clear tempered inside for curtain walls.
08800-3 Glazing

2.

3.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

C.

Glass for Skylight units with space framed formwork: Glass arrangement shall be as shown on drawing: 1. Sealed Insulated Glass Units: Conform to the requirements of sealed insulated glass units mentioned above, except for glass panes shall be fully tempered, LowE tinted gray for the outside and clear tempered laminated glass for the inside. Glass color shall be as shown drawings or approved by the Engineer. Sealed insulated glass with ceramic screen frit printed with 60 % coverage (6 mm diameter dots, 6.87mm center to center dot matrix) outside and clear laminated inside. Glass frit and pattern color shall be as approved by Engineer.

2.

D.

Security Glazing: Bullet resistant glass shall be manufactured by a specialist company dealing with security products of similar function. Products shall be of reputable company and approved by the Engineer. Bullet resistant glass shall be not less than 36 mm thick multiplayer laminated glass with polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer bonding together panes of glass under heat and pressure. Security glass shall offer protection against caliber .35 magnum handgun ammunition producing striking velocity of about 435 m/sec at 3 m from muzzle, 3 shots as per BS 5051, Class G1. The glass shall have at least 500 mm overlap at joints, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and shall be provided with stainless steel framing, satin polish finish. Size shall be as shown on Drawings. Frameless Glass: Frameless glass doors and partitions, where shown on Drawings, shall be of single clear fully tempered glass not less than 12 mm thickness, complying with the glazing requirements as mentioned above. Frameless glass partitions shall have concealed aluminum head and sill channels. Glass shall be butt-jointed using transparent silicone structural glazing sealant conforming to Section 07900 - SEALANTS. Stiles shall be of polished stainless steel finish. Provide required hardware as per manufacturers recommendation and in accordance with Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE.

E.

2.3.

MIRRORS A. Type I, Class I, Quality q, Clear float mirror, fully silvered electrically copper-plated, 6 mm thick, exposed edges ground and face corners cased, guaranteed against silver spoilage for 15 years. Size and location of mirrors shall be as indicated on Drawings.

B. 2.4.

GLAZING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Gaskets: Dense elastomeric seal gaskets shall be continuous neoprene or polyvinyl chloride extrusions, of 50 Shore A durometer hardness plus or minus 5 complying with ASTM C 864. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Conform to ASTM C 542, neoprene extrusions of required size and shape. Frames fabricated with injection molded corners. Provide with separate
08800-4 Glazing

B.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

lock (zipper) strips, Shore A durometer 10 points harder than gasket body.

C.

Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. Spacers: Neoprene blocks, 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, self-adhesive on one face only; compatible with sealant used. Use EPDM spacers for units set with silicone glazing sealant. Joint Cleaner, Primer and Sealer: As recommended by the glazing manufacturer. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed-celled or a waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 34.5 to 68.9 kPa compression strength for 25 percent deflection. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non-staining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated. Sealants: Conform to Section 07900 - SEALANTS.

D.

E. F.

G.

H.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels, stops and other framing members to receive glazing materials of obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately before application of primer and glazing media.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with recommendations and requirements of the FGMA Glazing Sealing Systems Manual and Glazing Manual. For the installation of all glass comply with glass manufacturers and glazing materials manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Provide watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass, so as to withstand temperature changes and wind loading normal at the site. Operating sash and doors shall withstand impact loading without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, and deterioration of glazing materials. Install butt-joint glazing according to the glass manufacturer's recommendations. Inspection: Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any pieces which are improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or any other evidence of damage. Use suction cups to shift glass units
08800-5 Glazing

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

within openings; do not drift glass with pry bars. Remove labels from glass immediately after installation. C. Setting Blocks: Locate setting blocks at sill rabbet one-quarter in from each end of the glass, unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set blocks in thin course of sealant that is acceptable for heel bead use. Spacers: Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than a combined total of 1.27 m or more for any two adjacent sides to separate glass from stops, except where continuous glazing gaskets are provided. Locate spacers no farther than 600 mm apart and no closer than 300 mm to a corner. Place spacers opposite one another. Make bite of spacer on glass a nominal 6 mm or greater. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated. Sealants: Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. For further requirements refer Section 07900 SEALANTS. Glazing Gaskets: Miter-cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lock-Strip Gaskets: 1. Comply with gasket manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Miter-cut corners of loose zipper strips slightly longer to provide permanent compression at joints. Use special tool to install and remove filler strips; lubricate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Comply with glass manufacturer's written instructions for the use of setting blocks, liquid or tape sealants, and weep holes in the glazing recess of lock strip gaskets.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

2.

3.2

PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers or ribbons attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markings to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Cover glass as required to protect it from additives that might abrade the glass surface. If, despite such protection, contaminating
08800-6 Glazing

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. Maintenance: Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction. Cleaning: Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to acceptance. Comply with instructions and recommendations of the glass manufacturer and glazing materials manufacturer for cleaning in each case.

D. E.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08800-7

Glazing

SECTION 08920 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. 1.2 Aluminum framing system. Vision glass panels. Other accessories including perimeter sealant.

REFERENCES A. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturer Association

AAMA CWGB1 AAMA CWBDGB1

Installation Aluminum Curtain Walls Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual

AAMA Series No. 11 - Design Windloads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing AAMA 501 AAMA 603.8 Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum

AAMA 605.2

AAMA 606.1

AAMA 607.1

AAMA 608.1

AAMA T1R - A1 Sound Control for Aluminum Curtain Walls and Windows AAMA FC-1 B. Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage

ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM A36 ASTM A386 Structural Steel Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products
08920-1 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

ASTM A446

Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class

ASTM B209 ASTM B221 ASTM E283

ASTM E330

ASTM E331

ASTM E413 C.

SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council SP-10 PS-12.00 Near-White Blast Cleaning Guide for Selecting Zinc-Rich Painting Systems

1.3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Glazed aluminum curtain wall system includes design, supply and installation of tubular aluminum sections with self-supporting framing, shop fabricated, factory prefinished, vision glass, glass spandrel infill, aluminum cladding and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices, and other required accessories.

1.4

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the following capabilities based on pre-construction testing: 1. Withstand loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure. Failure includes but not limited to the following: a) Deflection, air infiltration and water penetration exceeding the specified limits. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

b)

c)

B. C.

Glazing: Physically and thermally isolated from framing members. System is re-glazable from interior, except spandrel glazings are re-glazable from exterior.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08920-2

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

D.

Wind Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load inward and outward design pressures calculated according to requirements of the American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures"; 6.4.2 "Analytical procedure". Design and size components to withstand applicable seismic loads and sway displacement when wind loads effect maximum overturning moment. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 4 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4 m or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever is less. System to accommodate, without damage to system, components or deterioration of seals; movement within system; movement between system and perimeter framing components; dynamic loading and release of loads; deflection of structural support framing, shortening of building concrete structural columns, creep of concrete structural members and a mid-span slab edge deflection of 1/175 of clear span, 19 mm maximum. Structural Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E330. 1. 2. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressure. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

Condensation Resistance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems with condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55 CRF when tested according to AAMA 1503. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems with average U-factor of not more than 3.75 W/sq. m x K when tested according to AAMA 1503. Sound Transmission (Exterior to Interior): STC 32 minimum, measured according to ASTM E413. Air infiltration through Assembly: Limit air infiltration to 0.3 L/s/sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa. Water Penetration: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 20 percent of positive design wind load, but not less than 479 Pa. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain-wall systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
08920-3 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

J.

K.

L.

M.

N.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.

O.

System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 95 degrees C over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental affect to system components. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. Reinforce curtain wall system to accommodate window washing equipment guide rails. Provide anchors sufficiently rigid to resist loads caused by equipment platform, without damage to wall system]. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system.

P.

Q.

R.

S.

1.5

SUBMITTALS B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, weep drainage network, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. Product Data: 1. Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details and water flow diagrams. Product Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional limitations, special installation requirements.

C.

2.

C.

Submit 2 samples 300 x 300 mm in size illustrating prefinished aluminum surface, specified glass units, insulated infill panels, glazing materials illustrating edge and corner. Test Reports: Submit substantiating engineering data, test results of previous tests which purport to meet performance criteria, and other supportive data. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation procedures, instruction and other recommendations.

D.

E.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08920-4

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drawings and Specifications: Plans, elevations and details as shown on Drawings and the requirements specified herein, indicate design concept. The approved manufacturer shall be responsible for complete curtain wall system design based on the system performance requirements specified herein. Applicable Standards: Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. AAMA - Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.

B.

2. 1.7

QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum curtain wall systems with minimum 10 years successful documented experience. Installer for Total System: Company authorized by system manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work.

B.

C.

1.8

MOCKUP A. Provide a floor-to-floor mock-up including intermediate mullion, corner mullion, sill, vision glass light, and infill panel. Assemble to illustrate component assembly including glazing materials, weep drainage system, attachments, anchors, and perimeter sealant. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.

B. 1.9

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Handle work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10. Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.

B.

C.

1.10

WARRANTY A. Provide five year for the glazed curtain wall system. Warranty shall include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08920-5

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 2.2 Curtain walls shall be fabricated/ manufactured by HUECK or approved equal.

MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper shall be as recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221 Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429 Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10

Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A36 for structural shapes, plates and bars; ASTM A611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; ASTM A570 for hot-rolled sheet and strip. Glazing: Double glazed units as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 08800 - GLAZING. Glazing Gasket: Manufacturer standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers; in hardness as recommended by manufacturer. Glazing Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer for the intended application. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

C.

D.

E. F. G. 2.3

Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: Zinc rich type.

COMPONENTS A. Mullion Profile: Manufacturers standard aluminum extrusions and tubular section with exterior pressure plate; matching stops and pressure plate of sufficient size and strength to provide bite on glass and infill panels; drainage holes; deflector plates and internal flashings to accommodate internal weep drainage system; internal mullion baffles to eliminate "stack effect" air movement within internal spaces. Size of aluminum framing shall be as approved by Engineer. Reinforced Mullion: Where required, provide profile of extruded or sheet aluminum cladding with internal reinforcement of shaped steel structural section. Spandrel Panel: Internally reinforced, reflective glazing units, color to match vision glass including rigid insulation, vapor barrier spandrel glazing or panels. Wall Cladding: Aluminum with backing, plain, thickness minimum 0.7 mm; finish as selected by the Engineer to match curtain wall mullion sections.

B.

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08920-6

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

E.

Flashings: Aluminum, thickness as recommended by manufacturer to ensure flat surface, finish as selected to match curtain wall mullion sections where exposed, secured with concealed fastening method.

2.4

GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with the requirements specified in Section 08800 - GLAZING.

2.5 2.6

INSULATION: Refer to Section 07210 INSULATION. VAPOR BARRIER: shown on drawings. Provide polyethylene vapor barrier, 250 microns (10 mil) thick as

2.7

SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: Comply with the requirements of Section 07900 SEALANTS for perimeter sealants.

2.8

FABRICATION A. Fabricate curtain wall components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view. Where required, reinforce interior horizontal head rail to receive drapery track brackets and attachments. Reinforce framing members for external imposed loads.

B.

C. D. E.

F. 2.9

FINISHES A. Anodized Finish: Conform to AA C22A42; 22 micron thick; with shop-applied protective coating of clear acrylic lacquer or any coating in accordance with AAMA 602.2, 0.5 mil dry film thickness, over anodized finish. Color shall be as selected by the Engineer from manufacturers full range. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A386 to 610 gm/sq m). Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08920-7

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

3.1

EXAMINATION A. B. C. Verify site opening conditions. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Install curtain wall system in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions as well as AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual and AAMA - Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Where required, install sill flashings. Coordinate installation of fire and air stop insulation at each floor slab edge. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. Install operating sash in accordance with Drawings. Install louvers, associated flashings, blank-off plates and screening. Fit blank-off plates tight to ductwork. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800 - GLAZING. Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07900 SEALANTS.

B.

C.

D.

E. F. G. H. I.

J. K.

L. M.

3.3

TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: whichever is less. 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or (12 mm/30 m),

B.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.8 mm.

08920-8

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. Air Infiltration: Test areas of installed system for compliance with system performance requirements according to ASTM E783. Water Penetration: After completing the installation of 25-m by 2-story minimum area of glazed aluminum curtain wall system, test system for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 (Water Spray Test) in a 2-bay area as directed by the Engineer. Repair or remove Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements.

C.

D.

3.5

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. B. C. Adjust operating sash for smooth operation. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

D.

3.6

PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and Installer that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

08920-9

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

SECTION 08925 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Four-sided, structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls incorporating an aluminum framing system, anchors, supports and accessories as required.

1.2.

REFERENCES A. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturer Association AAMA Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance -Guide Specifications Manual. Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual. Curtain Wall Manual #10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site.

AAMA AAMA

AAMA Series No. 11 - Design Windloads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing. AAMA Series No. 13 - Structural Sealant Glazing Systems. AAMA 501 AAMA 603.8 Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls. Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. Sound Control for Aluminum Curtain Walls and Windows.

AAMA 605.2

AAMA 606.1

AAMA 607.1

AAMA 608.1

AAMA T1R - A1 B.

ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM A36 ASTM A386 Structural Steel. Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
08925 - 1 Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

J09-07800

ASTM A446

Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Test Method For Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class.

ASTM B209 ASTM B221 ASTM E283

ASTM E330

ASTM E331

ASTM C794

ASTM E413

C.

SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council SP-10 PS-12.00 Near-White Blast Cleaning Guide for Selecting Zinc-Rich Painting Systems

1.3.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System: Interior supporting aluminum mullions, perimeter glazing members, doubleglazed units, glazed on four sides with no intermediate mullions visible on exterior.

1.4.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system that has the following capabilities based on pre-construction testing: 1. Withstand loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure. Failure includes but not limited the following: a) Deflection, air infiltration and water penetration exceeding the specified limits. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

b)

c)

B.
ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

Glazing: Physically and thermally isolated from framing members.

08925 - 2

J09-07800

Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

C.

Glazing-to-glazing joints accommodate thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and system, prevent glazing-to-glazing contact, and maintain required edge clearance. Structural Sealant: Provide structural silicone sealant that withstands tensile and shear stresses imposed by system without failing adhesively or cohesively. Provide sealant that fails cohesively before sealant releases from substrate when tested for adhesive compatibility with each substrate and joint condition required. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from a substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within a joint but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

D.

2.

E.

Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in structural-sealant joints of less than 138 kPa. Structural sealant shall not carry gravity load of glazing. Wind Loads: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load inward and outward design pressures calculated according to requirements of the American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE-7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures6.4.2 "Analytical procedure". Design and size components to withstand applicable seismic loads, maintenance equipment loads and sidesway displacement when wind loads effect maximum overturning moment. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 4 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4 m or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever is less. Structural Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E330. 1. 2. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressure. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

Condensation Resistance: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall systems with condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55 CRF when tested according to AAMA 1503. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall systems with average U-factor of not more than 3.75 W/sq. m x K when tested according to AAMA 1503.

K.

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

08925 - 3

J09-07800

Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

L.

Sound Transmission (Exterior to Interior): STC 32 minimum, measured according to ASTM E413. Air infiltration through Assembly: Limit air infiltration to 0.03 L/s/sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 300 Pa. Water Penetration: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 20 percent of positive design wind load, but not less than 479 Pa. Thermal Movements: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.

M.

N.

O.

P.

System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 95 degrees C over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental affect to system components. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. Reinforce curtain wall system to accommodate window washing equipment guide rails. Provide anchors sufficiently rigid to resist loads caused by equipment platform, without damage to wall system]. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system.

Q.

R.

S.

T.

1.5.

SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, weep drainage network, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. Product Data: 1. Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill and internal drainage details. Product Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional limitations, special installation requirements.

B.

2.

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

08925 - 4

J09-07800

Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

C.

Submit 2 samples 300 x 300 mm in size illustrating finishes of exposed components including aluminum surface, glass units, glazing materials illustrating edge and corner. Test Reports: Submit substantiating engineering data, test results of previous tests which purport to meet performance criteria, and other supportive data. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation procedures, instruction and other recommendations.

D.

E.

1.6.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drawings and Specifications: Plans, elevations and details as shown on Drawings and the requirements specified herein, indicate design concept. The approved manufacturer shall be responsible for complete curtain wall system design based on the system performance requirements specified herein. Applicable Standards: Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. AAMA - Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.

B.

2. 1.7.

QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum curtain wall systems with minimum 10 years documented experience. Installer for Total System: Company authorized by system manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work.

B.

C.

1.8.

MOCKUP A. Provide a floor-to-floor mock-up including intermediate mullion, corner mullion, sill, vision glass light, and in-fill panel. Assemble to illustrate component assembly including glazing materials, weep drainage system, attachments, anchors, and perimeter sealant. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.

B. 1.9.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Handle work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10.

B.

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

08925 - 5

J09-07800

Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

C.

Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.10.

WARRANTY A. Provide one year for the glazed curtain wall system. Warranty shall include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 2.2. Curtain walls shall be fabricated/ manufactured by HUECK or approved equal.

MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper shall be as recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221 Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429 Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10

Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A36 for structural shapes, plates and bars; ASTM A611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; ASTM A570 for hot-rolled sheet and strip. Glazing: 24 mm thick fully tempered double glazed reflective units for vision panels and 6 mm thick fully tempered spandrel panels, as indicated on Drawings and as specified in Section 08800 - GLAZING. Color shall be blue green for reflective units. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, non-migrating types compatible with sealant and suitable for joint movement and system performance requirements. Bituminous paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

C.

D.

E.

2.3.

SEALANTS A. B. General: Use neutral-cure silicone sealants with insulating glass units. Structural Silicone Sealant: Type recommended by sealant and system manufacturer that complies with ASTM C 1184 requirements, is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, and is specifically formulated and tested for use as a structural sealant. 1. 2. 3. Color: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range. Tensile Strength: 100 psi minimum. Provide sealant with modulus of elasticity that will not allow movement of more than 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by
08925 - 6 Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

J09-07800

structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system design. C. Secondary Sealant: Compatible with structural silicone sealant and other system components which it comes on contact with and that accommodates a 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at the time of application when measured according to ASTM C 719. 1. 2.4. Color: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

COMPONENTS A. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements. Provide non-staining, non-ferrous shims for aligning system components. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall. 1. 2. 3. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of materials and type recommended by manufacturer. Where fasteners anchor into aluminum members, less than 3.2 mm thick, provide reinforcement to receive fasteners threads. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing members, unless otherwise approved.

B.

C.

Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.

D.

Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials and of type recommended by manufacturer.

2.5.

FABRICATION A. Fabricate frame components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush and hairline. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view. Reinforce framing members for external imposed loads.

B. C. D. E. 2.6.

FINISHES

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

08925 - 7

J09-07800

Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

A.

Anodized Finish: Conform to AA C22A42; 22 micron thick; with shop-applied protective coating of clear acrylic lacquer or any coating in accordance with AAMA 602.2, 0.5 mil dry film thickness, over anodized finish. Color shall be as selected by the Engineer from manufacturers full range. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A386 to 610 gm/sq m). Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. Verify site opening conditions. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Install structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as well as AAMA Series No. 13; AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual and AAMA Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances. Align with adjacent work. Install sill and flashings. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. Coordinate installation of fire and air stop insulation at each floor slab edge. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800 - GLAZING. Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria.

B.

C.

D.

E. F. G. H.

I. J. 3.3

TOLERANCES
08925 - 8 Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

J09-07800

A.

Maximum Variation from Plumb: whichever is less.

1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 12 mm/30 m,

B.

Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Glass Units and Mullions Abutting in Plane: 0.8 mm.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. Air Infiltration: Test areas of installed system for compliance with system performance requirements according to ASTM E783. Water Penetration: After completing the installation of 25-m by 2-story minimum area of structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall system, test system for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 (Water Spray Test) in a 2-bay area as directed by the Engineer. Repair or remove Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements.

C.

D.

3.5

CLEANING A. B. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

C.

3.6

PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and Installer that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh
Bldg WH01_04

08925 - 9

J09-07800

Structural Sealant Glazed Curtain Wall

SECTION 09200 LATH AND PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Plaster accessories including metal lath and plastering beads as well as control joints. Cement plaster Gypsum Plaster Sand-cement screed

B. C. D. 1.2.

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 109 ASTM A 570 Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Strip Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality Specification for Gypsum Plasters Test Method for Unit Weight and Molds in Aggregate Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster Specification for Gypsum Keene's Cement Specification for Portland Cement Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime Test Method for Physical testing of Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum concrete Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster Specification for Metal Lath Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster

ASTM C 28 ASTM C 29 ASTM C 35

ASTM C 61 ASTM C 150 ASTM C 206 ASTM C 472

ASTM C 841 ASTM C 842 ASTM C 847 ASTM C 926

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09200-1

Lath and Plaster

B.

ANSI - American National Standards Institute Inc. ANSI A42.1 ANSI A42.3 Gypsum Plastering Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement and Portland Cement-line, Exterior (Stucco) and Interior Specification for Interior Lathing and Furring

ANSI A42.4 C.

ML/SFA - Metal Lathing/Steel Framing Association ML/SFA Specification for metal lathing and furring

D.

SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO-43 SASO 142 SASO 143 SASO 855 Specification for Portland Cement Ordinary and Rapid Hardening Physical and Mechanical Testing Methods of Portland Cement Portland Cement, Ordinary and Rapid-Hardening White Portland Cement

1.3.

SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates showing compliance with the specified material requirements and installation and workmanship instructions. Samples: Submit 300 mm long samples of the proposed accessories.

B. 1.4.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Except for sand and water, deliver materials to the site in sealed containers or bags fully identified with manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated space, under cover, off the ground, and away from surface subject to dampness or condensation. Deliver accessories in their original containers bearing the name of the manufacturer and item identification.

B.

1.5.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Allowable Tolerance for Finished Work: For flat surfaces, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 meters for bow or warp of surface and for plumbness or level. Mock-up Installation: Prior to installation of plaster work, provide sample mock-up panels using materials specified for final work. Build sample panels at site, of full thickness and approximately 1.2 x 1.2 m. Demonstrate the proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work, and submit to Engineer for review. Retain sample panels construction as a standard for judging completed plaster work. Do not alter, move or destroy sample panel until plastering
09200-2 Lath and Plaster

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

work is completed. Provide a sample panel for interior and exterior Portland cement plaster and plaster on metal lath. 1.6. JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: 1. General: Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling, which may result from plastering operations. Provide temporary covering and whatever other provisions may be necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work. Finished door and window frames and other surfaces which do not receive a plaster finish shall be well protected during plaster application.

2.

B.

Environmental Conditions: 1. General: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic conditions to prevent rapid dry-out. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combination of these as required. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation to properly dry interior plaster during and subsequent to its application.

2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. PLASTER ACCESSORIES A. Galvanized steel furring, lathing and other plaster accessories shall conform to the material provisions of ASTM C 841 and ANSI A42.3. Plaster accessories shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Metal Corner Beads: Fabricated from galvanized sheet, 5 mm radius bead with 38 mm wide expanded type flanges. Strip Reinforcement: Smooth edge strips of expanded metal lath fabricated from galvanized steel sheet, with uncoated steel painted after fabrication. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with short or expanded flanges to suit kinds of plaster bases galvanized steel. Curved Casing Beads: Square-edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated on the Drawings. Control Joints: Prefabricated, galvanized steel one-or two-piece type as required. Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints.

2.

3.

4.

5.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09200-3

Lath and Plaster

6.

Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large mesh diamond lath fabricated from welded wire mesh from 1.2 mm diameter galvanized wire, specially formed to reinforce corners of Portland cement plaster where exposed while allowing full plaster encasement. Expanded Metal Lath: Galvanized steel diamond mesh complying with ASTM C 847 and shall have a minimum weight of 1.85 kg/m.

7.

B.

Coordinate the depth of accessories with the thickness and number of plaster coats required in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by Engineer.

2.2.

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER A. Portland cement plaster shall have a minimum thickness of 20 mm in a double coat provided using but not limited to the following materials: 1. 2. 3. Base Coat Cement: Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I. Finish Coat Cement: Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I. Factory-Prepared Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard product requiring only the addition of water; white in color unless otherwise indicated. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, conforming to ASTM C 206, Type S. Sand Aggregate for Base Coat: Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 897. Aggregate for Finish coat: Conform to ASTM C 897, manufactured or natural sand to match approved sample. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable, free of substances, capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath or accessories. Bonding Agents: Conform to ASTM C 932.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8. B.

Portland cement plaster mixes and compositions: 1. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for Portland cement plaster base and finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials and other requirements indicated. Submit samples of materials used for the approval of Engineer as well as mix design. Base Coat: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume for sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with following requirements for each method of application and plaster base as required. Adjust mix proportions indicated herein within the limits specified to attain workability as follows: a) Two-coat Work over Concrete or Unit Masonry: Base coats shall be one part Portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 4 parts sand.
09200-4 Lath and Plaster

2.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

3.

Finish Coat: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials for aggregates with one part Portland cement, 3/4 to 11/2 parts lime and 3 parts sand.

2.3.

GYPSUM PLASTER (FOR INTERNAL PLASTERING) A. Gypsum Plaster Materials: 1. Base Coat Plaster: Conform to ASTM C 28, ready-mixed gypsum, high strength gypsum neat plaster with minimum average dry compressive strength of 19.3 MPa according to ASTM C 472 for a mix of 45 kg plaster and 0.19 m3 of sand. Finish Coat Plaster: Ready-mixed gypsum finished plaster, manufacturer's standard mill-mixed gauged interior finish or high-strength gypsum gauging plaster, conforming to ASTM C 28, with a minimum average dry compressive strength of 34.5 MPa according to ASTM C 472 for neat mix. Lime: Conform to ASTM C 206, hydrated lime, Type S, for finishing purposes, unless otherwise indicated. Aggregates for Base Coat: Conform to ASTM C 35, sand aggregate, unless otherwise indicated. Bonding Agent: Conform to ASTM C 631.

2.

3.

4.

5. B.

Gypsum plaster mixes and compositions: 1. Plaster Base Coat Compositions: Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's directions for gypsum plaster base coat proportions which corresponds to application and plaster bases as indicated below: a) Three-coat Work over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats of high strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand. Two-Coat Work Over Unit Masonry and Concrete: Base coats of gypsum neat plaster with job-mix sand.

b)

2.

Finish Coat: Proportion materials for finish coat to comply with ASTM C 842 for type of finish coat and texture required.

2.4.

FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM UNITS A. Fiber reinforced gypsum units for domed and vaulted ceiling: Pre-fabricated using un-layered spray lay-up procedures and combined with high strength gypsum plaster formulated specially for combination with glass fibers with no special additives. Fabricate units to shapes, sizes, configuration and required thickness in accordance with approved shop drawings. Finishes shall be as indicated on drawings. For ceiling paint finishes, refer to Interior Design (I.D.) Specification Book entitled PAINT TYPE & COLOUR issued in separate volume.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09200-5

Lath and Plaster

B.

Embeds and inserts: Non-combustible and metal components shall be zinc coated or galvanized. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self tapping type drywall screws, length as required for each assembly. a) 2. Wire Hangers: Minimum 12 gage galvanized steel wire.

C.

Joint Treatment: Conform to ASTM C 475; type as recommended by the manufacturer. Joint Tape shall be perforated type. Joint compound shall be ready mix vinyl-type for interior use. Provide bedding and topping type compounds. Adhesives: Construction type, as recommended by the Manufacturer.

3. D.

Fabrication: 1. Construct molds for reinforced gypsum units of materials to result smooth, finished products conforming to sizes and shapes indicated on Drawings. Meter glass fiber and plaster slurry rates at spray head to achieve the desired mix proportioned glass content. Machine sprays conforming to the Manufacturer's standards for multidirectional, chopped fibers. Imbed wire hanger inserts in matrix to develop full strength. Remove units from molds and repair surface imperfections. Cure units in accordance with the Manufacturer's standards. Units final surface shall be primer ready.

2.

3.

4.

5.

2.5.

SAND CEMENT SCREED A. Sand cement screed be composed of a mixture of Portland Cement type I, natural sand, crushed stone or a combination of them, as well as water and other additives as indicated on Drawings and as required by the Engineer. Submit the design mix for Engineers approval. Screed shall have minimum thickness of 50 mm unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Test screed for a minimum compressive strength of 22 MPa after 28 days.

B.

C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATHING AND FURRING - GENERAL A.


ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Install interior lathing and furring materials indicated for plaster to comply with ASTM C 841.
09200-6 Lath and Plaster

B.

Install lathing and furring materials indicated for Portland cement plaster to comply with ANSI A42.3. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations of work for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar work in accordance with details indicated on Drawings or approved shop drawings. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally, and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories.

C.

D.

E.

3.2

INSTALLATION OF CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems, ducting and catwalks to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacings required to support ceiling. Furnish concrete inserts, and other devices indicated, to other trades for installations well in advance of time needed for coordination with other work. Attach hangers to structure above ceiling to comply with ML/SFA - Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring as well as with referenced standards. Install ceiling suspension system components of sizes and spacings indicated but not in smaller sizes or greater spacings than that required by the referenced lathing and furring installation standards.

B.

C.

D.

3.3

METAL LATHING A. Install expanded metal lath for the applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration and weight of metal lath selected from materials required which comply with referenced lathing installation standards.

3.4

INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. Accessories: 1. Corner Beads: Install at external corners.

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09200-7

Lath and Plaster

2.

Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work, except where plaster passes behind and is concealed by other work and where metal screed, bases or metal frames act as casing beads. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated, or if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced standard and recommended by plaster manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Corner Reinforcement: Install at external corners.

3.

4. 3.5

PLASTER APPLICATION A. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding compound or agent to comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards for conditioning of monolithic surfaces. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 3 mm in 3000 mm from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3000 mm straightedge placed at any location on surface. Grout hollow metal frames, bases and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base coat plaster material, and prior to lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout 150 mm lengths at each anchorage. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work, so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other. Plaster finish with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories which act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base coat-free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat the juncture with metal. Apply thickness and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by referenced standards, and as per manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Cement Plaster: Base coat shall be 20 mm thick for concrete and CMU. Finish coat shall be 3 mm. Gypsum Plaster (for internal use): Base coat shall be 12 mm thick. Finish coat shall be 3 mm.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

2.

G.

Concealed Plaster: Where plaster application will be concealed by wood paneling, above suspended ceilings and similar locations, finish-coat maybe omitted. Where plaster application will be concealed behind cabinets and similar furnishings and equipment apply finish-coat. Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes, omit finish-coat and coordinate thickness with overall dimension as shown and comply with tolerances specified.

3.6

SAND-CEMENT SCREED A. Roughened the concrete slabs to receive screeding before hardening. Clean and wet the hardened base surfaces, preferably overnight prior to laying of screeds.
09200-8 Lath and Plaster

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

B.

Batch accurately aggregates and cement by weight at a ratio of cement-aggregate ranging from 1-3 to 1-4.5. Mix screeding material mechanically. Lay and finish the screed mix carefully to true levels and correct heights for the required thickness. Tolerance in level over a 2 m length shall not exceed plus or minus 3 mm. Provide adequate means of curing to prevent rapid drying of screed as directed by the Engineer.

C.

D.

3.7

CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, point-up and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry-outs, efflorescence, sweat-outs and similar defects and where bond to the substrate has failed. Sand smooth-trowelled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arises.

B. 3.8

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers and equipment and clean remove unused materials, containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris. Provide final protection and maintain conditions which ensure plaster work being without damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.

B.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09200-9

Lath and Plaster

SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. Ceiling suspension system, wall framing and furring systems for dry walls. Gypsum for walls and ceilings. Miscellaneous materials and the related accessories as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 887 B. Gypsum Plaster Board

ANSI - American National Standards Institute, Inc. A97.1 Standard Specifications for the Application of Finishing of Wallboard

C.

ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM A 525 Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-dip Process Specification for Gypsum Wallboard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Core Board Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Wallboard Construction Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board Specification for Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
09250-1 Gypsum Board

ASTM A 641 ASTM A 653

ASTM C 36 ASTM C 442 ASTM C 475

ASTM C 630 ASTM C 645

ASTM C 754

ASTM C 840
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

D.

GA - Gypsum Association GA 201 GA 216 Using Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board Special Recommendations - Gypsum Board Winter Related Problems Recommendations for Covering Interior Walls and Ceilings with Gypsum Board

GA 220

GA 650

E.

BS British Standards Institute BS 476 Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions for each gypsum drywall component, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples for the Engineer's approval. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawing of layout and details of ceiling and/or partitions for the Engineer's approval. Mock-Up: Install a full size mock-up showing different elements completed for drywall partitions and ceilings.

B. C.

D.

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Comply with the requirements of transportation, handling and storage specified in ASTM C 840.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. METAL SUPPORT SYSTEM A. Ceiling Support System: 1. Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive coating (Galvanized), hot or cold-rolled, minimum nominal thickness 0.6 mm with 40 mm flanges and channel web of suitable size. Hanger Wire: Conform to ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1, galvanized. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel with zinc or equally rust inhibitive coating for rods and zinc or rust-inhibitive paint finish for flats.

2. 3.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09250-2

Gypsum Board

4.

Furring Members: Conform to ASTM C 645, not less than 0.6 mm thick, hatshaped with 19 mm flanges. Furring Anchorage: Conform to ASTM C 754, 1.6 mm diameter galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire-type clips, bolts, nails or screws. Direct Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard zinc-coated or painted steel system of furring runners, tees, and accessories designed for concealed support of gypsum drywall ceilings.

5.

6.

B.

Wall/Partition Support Materials: 1. Runners, Studs and Furring: Formed from steel sheets conforming to ASTM C 645 with manufacturer's standard hot-dipped galvanized coating to ASTM A653, G60, minimum 0.7 mm thick with web dimension compatible with thickness of wall as shown on Drawings. Provide holes and knockouts for utilities. Furring members shall be hat-shaped type.

2.2.

GYPSUM BOARD A. Regular gypsum board for General Use: Conform to the requirements of SASO 887 or ASTM C 36, Grade R or DIN 18-180, regular, 12 mm thick for ceilings and 15 mm for walls with tapered or beveled edges. Moisture-resistant gypsum board for Toilets, Washroom, Showers, Ablution Areas and Similar Wet Areas: Conform to SASO 887 or ASTM C 630 or DIN 18-180, Type X, 12 mm thick for ceilings and 15 mm thick for walls with tapered or beveled edges. Fire retardant wallboard: Where indicated on Drawings, use Type X, same requirements as mentioned above.

B.

C.

2.3.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping bugle head for use with powder-driven tool and of the type recommended by board manufacturer for the intended application. Fasteners for furring members: Type and size shall be as recommended by furring manufacturer for the substrate and intended application.

2.

B.

Joint Treatment Materials: 1. Joint reinforcing tape: Perforated type, width range between 45 mm and 60 mm, and 0.3 mm thick. Joint compound: As recommended by the board manufacturer for the intended application and in accordance with ASTM C 475. Concealed Sealants: Mastic type, non-shrink, non-drying, non-migrating, and non-staining sealant.
09250-3 Gypsum Board

2.

3.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

4. C.

Exposed Sealant: Acrylic-latex type, permanently elastic and paintable.

Acoustic Insulation: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07210 BUILDING INSULATION. Trim Accessories: 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L-type edge trim-beads, U-type edge trim-beads, special L-kerf type edge trim-beads, and one-piece control joint beads as required.

D.

2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate work with the structural ceiling work to insure that the inserts as well as the other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers.

3.2

INSTALLATION OF FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Ceiling Support System: Installation shall conform to ASTM C 754. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices and fasteners as indicated. Wall Support System: Installation shall conform to ASTM C 754. Align top and bottom tracks to assure plumb wall. Secure track with suitable fasteners at a maximum of 600 mm on center. Position studs in track at 600 mm on center spacing. Installation of framing system shall comply with requirements of ASTM C840 or GA 216.

B.

C.

3.3

BOARD INSTALLATION A. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings, and stagger not less than 300 mm in alternate courses of board. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end-butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Install wallboard vertically to avoid end-butt joints wherever possible. Install boards with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1.5 mm open space between boards. Do not force in place.
09250-4 Gypsum Board

B.

C. D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

E.

Installation of ceiling boards shall comply with requirements of ASTM C840 or GA 216.

3.4

ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. When face of paper for gypsum board is punctured, a new screw shall be driven approximately 30 mm from puncture and fill damaged surface with compound. Fill cracks with compound and finish smooth and flush.

B. 3.5

PROTECTION OF WORK A. The required procedures for protecting drywall work from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction period shall be as recommended by board manufacturer or drywall installer and approved by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09250-5

Gypsum Board

SECTION 09310 TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. 1.2 Ceramic floor and wall tiles Porcelain tiles. Quarry Tiles Miscellaneous materials including tile adhesive, grout, and sealants.

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 142 SASO 143 SASO 1030 SASO 1031 B. Physical and Mechanical Testing Methods of Portland Cement Portland Cement, Ordinary and Rapid-Hardening Methods of Test for Cement Tiles Ceramic Tiles

ANSI - American National Standards Institute: A108.1 A108.4 A118.1 A118.2 A118.3 Installation of Glazed Wall Tiles Ceramic Tiles Installed with Water-Resistant Organic Adhesives Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Conductive Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Chemical-Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy Ceramic Tile Grouts Organic Adhesive for Installation of Ceramic Tiles Standard Specification for Ceramic Tiles

A118.6 E136.1 A137.1 C.

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C 206 Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09310-1

Tiles

ASTM C 373 Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware ASTM C 648 Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile ASTM C 1027 Abrasion Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile D. TCA - Tile Council of America: TCA 137.1 Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile

TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. B. Complete set of samples of manufacturer's standard products for color selection. Certification from manufacturer of tile certifying the following: C. D. 1.4 Materials provided are suitable for intended use. Materials meet or exceed appropriate ANSI Standard or SASO Standard.

Tile manufacturer's complete installation instructions. Shop drawing layout showing the tile arrangements.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in containers with labels legible and intact and grade-seals unbroken. Store material so as to prevent damage or contamination.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tiles of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer. Mockups: Build mockups for the approval of the Engineer to verify qualities of materials and execution. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Variation in plane of sub-floor, including concrete fills: Not more than 6 mm in 3 meters from required elevation where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used and not more than 3 mm in 3 meters where dry-set Portland cement, and latex-Portland cement mortar setting beds and chemical resistant bond coats are used.

B.

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09310-2

Tiles

E.

Variation in plane of wall surfaces and surface of scratch coat: Not more than 6 mm in 2.40 meters from required plane where Portland cement mortar setting bed is used and not more than 3 mm in 2.40 meters where dry-set or latex-Portland cement mortar or organic adhesive setting materials are used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CERAMIC TILES A. General: 1. Ceramic tiles shall have a standard grade quality in accordance with the Grade Specifications of ANSI A137.1 or DIN 18166 or BS 1286 or SASO 1031. Tiles shall be stain resistant, impact resistant and slip resistant (floor). Unless otherwise indicated, minimum requirements for ceramic wall and floor tiles shall be Grade-1, best quality glazed tiles, 6 mm thick for walls and 8 mm thick for floors. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard trim including bullnose, cove base and related corners, and half pieces required for the complete installation. Selection and Size: Type, color and pattern shall be as indicated on Drawings unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

2.

3.

4.

B.

Physical Properties: 1. Breaking strength: Minimum 250 kg for floor 100 kg for wall tiles to ASTM C 648. Water absorption: Maximum 0.5 % for floor and 11% for wall tiles to ASTM C 373. Coefficient of Friction (COF): MOHs: Minimum 7. Minimum 0.5 (wet & dry) to ASTM C 1028.

2.

3. 4. 2.3.

PORCELAIN TILES A. Fine porcelain stoneware tiles shall be manufactured by using top quality fine porcelain stoneware, obtained by raw materials wet grinding, followed by partial drying by spraying, silo storage to allow homogenization of properties, and pressing by hydraulic pressure exceeding 500 kg/cm2, and heat treatment in excess of 12000C. Porcelain tiles shall be of sizes, pattern and color as shown on Interior Design (I.D.) drawings. Physical properties, as follows:

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09310-3

Tiles

Properties Dimensions and appearance Water absorption Flexural strength Scratch resistance Deep abrasion resistance Linear thermal expansion coefficient Resistance to sudden temperature changes Resistance to chemical etching by acids and bases Color stability to light Specific weight Weight of unit of volume 2.4. QUARRY TILES A. Physical Properties: 1. 2.

Applicable Standard EN 98 EN 99 ISO PROJECT 10545/3 EN 100 EN 101 EN 102 EN 103 EN 104 EN 106 DIN 51094 DIN 51057 DIN 5165

Value Compliant 0.1% 50 N/mm2 6 MOHS 140 mm3 -6 -1 6 x 10 deg C Compliant Compliant Compliant 2.52 g/cm3 3 2.40 g/cm

Coefficient Of Friction (Dry):

0.50 or better per ASTM C1028.

Acid & Alkaline Resistance: Resistant to all caustic & corrosive liquids (except fluorides and concentrated hydrochloric acid) per ASTM C650. Hardness And Indentation Effect of Fire: Water Absorption: Thermal Conductivity: Thermal Expansion: Abrasion Resistance: Modulus Of Rupture: Not less than 6 on the MOHs scale. Non-combustible to BS 476: Part 4. Less than 3 % (Max.) per ASTM C373. K = 1.00W/m2 deg. C Between 20 to 500 deg. C = 6x106 / C. Index of 35 N/mm2 or better. ASTM C501 Min. 250 lbs ASTM C648. (Breaking Strength)

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Compressive Strength: 10,000 PSI or better (ASTM C67) Static Coefficient of Friction: Facial Size Variation: Wedging: Warpage: 0.50 or better.

Not more than 4% from nominal dimensions. Maximum 1 % per ASTM C502 Max. 1.5% along any edge 1.0% on either diagonal per ASTM C485 Max. Range of 0.050 per ASTM C499
09310-4 Tiles

15.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Thickness:

2.5.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive and Grout: 1. Tile Adhesive: Shall be white cement-based polymer modified ready-mixed powder adhesive conforming to BS 5980:1980, Type 1, Class AA, or equivalent standards. Use 3-6 mm bed thickness mixed with admixture as per manufacturers written recommendations. Grouting Material: Shall be cement-based polymer modified ready-mixed powder conforming to BS 5750:Part 2 or equivalent standards. Use grout with admixture as per manufacturers written recommendations. Color of grout shall be as approved by Engineer.

2.

B.

Sealants: Elastomeric type, in conformance with the requirements specified in Section 07900 - SEALANTS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation of floor and wall tiles shall comply with the requirement of ANSI A108.1 through A108.6 and the TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, unless otherwise indicated. Protection and Curing: 1. Spaces in which tile is being set shall be closed to traffic and other work. Keep closed until tile is firmly set. Protect tile from damage. Damp cure for at least 3 days; add dampness as needed to achieve a hard cure.

B.

2.

C.

Jointing Pattern: 1. Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are the same size. layout tile work and center tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of widths less than 1/2 tile at edge of walls. Provide uniform joints, not less than 5 mm and not more than 7 mm unless otherwise shown.

3.2

INSTALLATION OF WALL TILES A. Ceramic tiles on concrete and CMU walls shall be installed with tile adhesive on cured cement plaster. Tiles shall not be soaked prior to installation. Tiles shall be pressed firmly into freshly notched 3 to 6 mm thick tile adhesive and shall be tapped and beaten to a true surface.

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09310-5

Tiles

C.

Joint width shall be determined by spacers on tile or by strings or pegs if tile without spacers are used. Tiles shall be pressed and beaten into place to obtain full coverage by adhesive on back. Tiles shall be adjusted before initial set of adhesive takes place. Grouting Wall Tiles: Grouting shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be cured as required to produce a hard grout.

D.

E. F.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILES A. Install tiles with adhesive 3 - 6 mm thick tile adhesive as per manufacturer's written recommendations over Portland cement screed sloped to drains, not less than 20 mm thick and not more than 30 mm thick. Press tiles firmly into the adhesive to obtain full contact with adhesive with no voids. Grouting Floor Tiles: Grouting shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be cured as required to produce a hard grout.

B. C.

3.4

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, all ceramic and quarry tiles surfaces shall be cleaned free of foreign matter. 1. Glazed tiles surfaces shall be sponged and washed thoroughly diagonally across joints and finally polished with clean, dry clothes. Unglazed tiles may be cleaned with cleaners and/or solvents recommended by tile manufacturer after completion of installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning materials. Flush and surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

2.

B.

Finished installation shall be left clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded or otherwise defective tile work. Apply a protective clear sealer coat(s) for unglazed tiles. Number of coats shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during the construction period to prevent damage. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. Seal plumbing and electrical penetrations through wall tile as specified in Section 07900 - SEALANTS.

C.

D.

E.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09310-6

Tiles

SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. Grid suspension system for acoustical ceiling. Mineral fiber acoustical ceiling tiles as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Acoustical ceiling panels as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this section.

C. 1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 446 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural Quantity Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire Test for Sound Absorption Reverberation Rooms of Acoustical Materials in

ASTM A 525 ASTM A 614 ASTM C 423

ASTM C 523 ASTM E 90

Light Reflectance of Acoustical Material Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels Tests for Strength Properties of Prefabricated Architectural Acoustical Materials

ASTM E 84 ASTM C 635

ASTM C 636

ASTM C 637

B.

UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL Fire Resistance Directory, 1989 Edition

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Samples of grid system components and ceiling tiles.


09510-1 Acoustical Tiles

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

B. 1.4

Certification that the components meet the requirements and tests specified.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from humidity, direct sun light, surface contamination, and other causes. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for 1 year from the date of substantial handover. Guarantee shall cover repair and replacement of defective material and workmanship.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage an experience installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for the Project.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical materials unless temperature and humidity conditions closely approximate the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions during and after installation. Plastering, concrete and terrazzo work (including grinding) shall be completely dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard exposed grid system designed and fabricated to meet requirements of ASTM C 635 with UL classification as approved by the Engineer. Materials: Double-web, cold-rolled electro-galvanized steel with the following features: C. D. E.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

B.

Face Dimension: 15/16 Profile: Exposed Tee Color: As selected by the Engineer from the Manufacturer's standard range of products Finish: Baked polyester paint

Hanger Wires: Galvanized steel wires, pre-stretched, 2.8 mm diameter. Hanger Wire Anchors: Drill-in type as approved by the Engineer. Accessories: Edge Moldings, hold-down clips and other necessary accessories shall
09510-2 Acoustical Tiles

be provided in accordance with the Engineer's selection and approval.

2.2.

ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE A. Tile Construction: Wet-formed mineral fiber composition conforming to ASTM E 1264 or Federal Specifications FS-SS-S-118B, Type III, form 1 units; Class A with an STC Range from 35 - 40; Flame Spread of 0 - 25 and Smoke Developed 0 - 50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. Profiles: Square-cut and Beveled Tegular, lay-in type. Sizes: 600 x 600 mm as indicated on Drawings. Thickness: Not less than 19 mm. Finish: Factory-applied washable white finish with light reflectance value of LR-1 (over 75 percent).

B.

Access Hatches: Provide manufacturer standard access hatches which are designed specially for the acoustical ceiling systems. Provide the access hatches with complete features including door locks, frames, pivots, metal trims and gaskets.

2.3.

ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. Subparagraph below represents standard mounting referenced in ASTM e 1264. Revise if testing units with another mounting method is required for Project. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing ASTM E 1264 pattern designations and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range of products that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. Treatment below is available from armstrong world Industries and USG interiors for some panel products. If paragraph is retained, correlate with panel product characteristics in schedule. Delete if not needed or if treatment is not available for product selected.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09510-3

Acoustical Tiles

G.

Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial solution consisting of a synergistic blend of substituted ammonium salts of alkylated phosphoric acids admixed with free alkylated phosphoric acid that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gramnegative bacteria. Panel Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated in the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM E 1264 classifications. Vibration Isolation: Provide manufacturer's standard vibration isolation units at hangers as required . Installation: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply UBC, ASTM C 636, manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." Provide edge moldings, hold-down clips and other necessary accessories as required.

H.

I.

J.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all exposed grid acoustical work covered in this section shall be done by a qualified acoustical subcontractor recommended by the manufacturer, having at least 5 years experience in successfully completed projects.

3.2

SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Installation of suspension system shall be in accordance with ASTM C 636 and in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Rough Suspension: 1. Space hanger wires at 1200 mm on centers, each direction. Supported from structural angle runners by looping and wire-tying. Hangers shall be installed at ends of each suspension member and at light fixtures, 150 mm from vertical surfaces. Wires shall not be splayed more than 125 mm in a 1200 mm vertical drop. Wire shall be wrapped a minimum of three times horizontally, turning the ends upward.

B.

2.

3. 4.

C. D.

System shall be level within tolerance specified and parallel with walls. Wall moldings shall be installed at intersection of suspended ceiling an vertical surfaces. 1. Corners shall be mitered where wall moldings intersect or corner caps shall be installed in lieu thereof.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09510-4

Acoustical Tiles

2.

Continuous ribbon of acoustical adhesive or caulking compound shall be applied on vertical web. Attachment to vertical surface shall be by means of mechanical fasteners.

3. 3.3

CEILING TILES A. Installation of acoustical ceilings shall not begin until the building has been closed to weather with Relative Humidity not more than 70 percent. Ceiling tiles shall be in a leveled plane and in straight line courses. Provide cutting and patching for the passage of materials of other trades.

B. C. 3.4

CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceiling including trims, edges, moldings and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09510-5

Acoustical Tiles

SECTION 09547 METAL CEILING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Metal ceiling systems as shown on drawings and as specified herein.

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 446 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural Quantity Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire Test for Sound Absorption of Acoustical Materials in Reverberation Rooms Light Reflectance of Acoustical Material Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels Tests for Strength Properties of Prefabricated Architectural Acoustical Materials

ASTM A 525 ASTM A 614 ASTM C 423

ASTM C 523 ASTM E 90

ASTM E 84 ASTM C 635

ASTM C 636

ASTM C 637

B.

UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL Fire Resistance Directory, 1989 Edition

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. B. Samples of grid system components and ceiling units. Certification that the components meet the requirements and tests specified.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09547-1

Metal Ceiling

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver metal ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from humidity, direct sun light, surface contamination, and other causes. Handle metal ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for 1 year from the date of substantial handover. Guarantee shall cover repair and replacement of defective material and workmanship.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage an experience installer who has successfully completed metal ceilings similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for the Project.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install metal ceiling unless temperature and humidity conditions closely approximate the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions during and after installation. Plastering, concrete and terrazzo work (including grinding) shall be completely dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. METAL PAN CEILING A. Suspension System: 1. Manufacturer's standard spring-T concealed grid clip-in type suspension system manufactured from electro-galvanized mild steel comprising of channels to which secondary spring tees are attached, and shall be providing a firm grip for the ceiling panels. Suspension system shall be as recommended by manufacturer of aluminum ceiling panels.

B.

Metal Ceiling Panels: 1. Plain without Acoustic Insert: Manufacturer's standard precoated panels formed from minimum 1 mm thick aluminum flat sheet, alloy 3005-H26; perforated surface, formed to snap on and be securely retained on carriers without separate fasteners. Panel face dimensions of metal ceiling shall be as shown on drawings. Panels shall be cut to fit design and pattern shown in the ceiling plan. a. Finish and Perforation: Electrostatically applied polyester powdercoated finish, 60 80 micron thick; color and perforation shall be as selected by the Engineer from manufacturers standard full color range and finishes.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09547-2

Metal Ceiling

2.

Perforated Metal Ceiling Tiles with Acoustic Insert: a. Materials and Manufacture: Tiles shall be formed from electrogalvanized mild steel with an electrostatically applied smooth polyester powder coated finish to RAL9010 white unless otherwise noted on Drawings. Tile Composition and Shape: Shall be demountable tile, 600 mm x 600 mm, flush, decorative perforation patterns and acoustic pad insert hermitically sealed into the back of the tile with reinforced aluminum foil. Tile shall have the following performance properties: 1) 2) Tile Depth: Infill: Tissue Mineral wool acoustic pad (0.05 mm) (15 mm thick, density of 80 kg/m3) Tear-resistant aluminum foil (0.6 mm) Fleece (0.05 mm) Backing plate (0.6 gauge) 3) 4) 5) c. Sound Reduction Sound Absorption Thermal Insulation 44 dB 0.75 0.36 W/m0C 16 mm

b.

Suspension System: Manufacturers standard product consisting of galvanized steel carriers with an extruded aluminum shadowline threadform section locked together to form a modular grid with all junctions machined to create mitred birdsmouth intersections on the grid face. Finished face shall be polyester powder coated to RAL1090 White, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.

2.2.

LINEAR METAL CEILING A. Suspension System:

1.

Manufacturer's standard carriers; formed after painting from 1 mm aluminum alloy 3005-H26 into a hat section member, 43 mm deep with protruding cars designed to allow a 16 mm wide space between ceiling panels as well as providing a firm grip for the ceiling panels. Both slanted sides carriers shall have 0.2 mm diameter holes, to accommodate wire hangers as well as along spines to permit attachment to overhead structural supports.

2.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09547-3

Metal Ceiling

B.

Linear/Strip Metal Ceiling: 1. Linear/Strip Metal Ceiling: Manufacturer's standard units formed after painting from 0.5 mm thick aluminum sheet, alloy 3005-H26; unperforated surface, 100 mm face width by 16 mm deep; length 6.0 m; with 16 mm gap between units (on longer side) and formed to snap on and be securely retained on carriers without separate fasteners. Finish: Powder-coated finish, 60 80 micron thick; color as shown on drawings or as selected by the Company Representative from manufacturers full range of standard finishes and color.

2.

2.3.

ACCESSORIES: A. Provide the Manufacturer's standard system accessories including access sections, end plugs, etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install metal ceiling system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce finished ceiling to the tolerances specified herein, free of warped, soiled, or damaged grid, panels and other components. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. Verify layout of hangers and locate to accommodate fittings and units of equipment placed after installation of ceiling system. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels required to span the distance. Install hangers/inserts in coordination with overhead work and provide additional hangers/inserts as required. Hang independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduits. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members. Install ceilings in accordance with the final reflected ceiling layout and symmetrical in both directions from the center line of the area. Support fixture loads by supplementary hanger located within 152 mm of each corner when weight of fixture causes the dead load to exceed the deflection capability. Support the fixtures independently. Install angle moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths, true and level. Miter all corners.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09547-4

Metal Ceiling

3.2

TOLERANCE A. Install ceiling system in a manner capable of supporting superimposed loads with maximum permissible deflection of 1/360 of span and a maximum surface deviation of 3 mm in 3000 mm.

3.3

ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Adjust sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system. Replace damaged or faulty parts. Clean exposed surfaces of metal ceilings, including trims, edge moldings and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. Protect metal ceilings, maintaining such temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, that the work will be without damage and deterioration till the date of substantial completion of the Project.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09547-5

Metal Ceiling

SECTION 09600 STONEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. Marbles Granites Stone Cladding Anchors and attachments, setting materials, grouts, and accessories related to stone works.

1.2

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 1026/1995 SASO 1027/1995 SASO 814/1994 B. Methods of Test for Tiles of Natural Marble Natural Marble Tiles Marble

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM C615 ASTM C503 ASTM C 568 ASTM C 616 ASTM C 1526 ASTM C 629 ASTM C 1527 Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone Specification for Quartz-based Dimension Stone Specification for Serpentine Dimension Stone Specification for Slate Dimension Stone Specification for Travertine Dimension Stone.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for the type of stone as well as accessories and other manufactured products required. Samples: Submit samples in the form of sets for each color, grade, finish, type and variety of materials required. Sample size shall be 600 x 600 mm. Include 2 or more samples in each set showing full range of variations in appearance and

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09600-1

Stonework

characteristics to be expected in the completed work also submit samples of fixing devices and joint sealants for the approval of the Engineer.

1.4

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect stone, mortar materials and accessories during storage and construction against moisture, soiling, staining and physical damage. Handle stone in a manner to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or any other damage. Store stone on wood skids or pallets covered with a waterproof non-staining membrane.

B.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type and variety of stone from a single quarry, approved by the Engineer. Execute the work under this Section through a specialized firm approved by the Engineer and having at least 5 years experience in successful projects.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. MARBLES Marble - General: Marble stone shall be cut from sound stock with even texture, shade, marking, free from imperfections and as approved by the Engineer. 1. Type, color, texture and finish of marble shall be as indicated on Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Nominal Thickness: 30 mm thick unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide marble of the highest density available for the particular type selected, free from imperfections and even texture. Obtain marble from one quarry with consistent color range and texture throughout the work. Finish: Polished.

2. 3.

4.

5. B.

Marble for Flooring and Base: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, marble shall be 20 mm thick, length and width dimensions of individual slabs within plus or minus 1 mm, thickness within 2 mm from those specified. Marble for Stair Treads and Risers: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, marble shall be 30 mm for treads with non-slip nosing and 20 mm for risers. Marble and Granite for Thresholds: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, thresholds shall be not less than 30 mm thick with dimensions as shown on Drawings.
09600-2 Stonework

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

2.2

GRANITE A. Granite - General: 1. Type, size, color, texture and finish of granite shall be as indicated on Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Provide granite of the highest density available for the particular type selected, free from imperfections and even texture. Obtain granite from one quarry with consistent color range and texture throughout the work. Provide granite cut from sound stock with even texture, shade and marking, and free from imperfections. Finish: Polished.

2.

3.

4.

5. B.

Provide granite to the shapes and sizes indicated on the Drawings with length and width dimensions of each individual slab within plus or minus 1 mm and thickness within 2 mm from those specified. Granite for stair treads and risers shall be of sizes as indicated on Drawings, thickness not less than 30 mm for treads with non-slip carborundum inserts and 25 mm for risers and landing. Granite shall be laid with matching grain and color.

C.

D. 2.3 Stone A.

General: Stone for wall cladding shall be cut from sound stock with homogenous color, texture, free from imperfections and as approved by the Engineer. 1. Stone type. Size, color, texture and finish of stone shall be as indicated on Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Obtain stone from one quarry with consistent color range and texture throughout the work.

2.

B.

Stone for Wall Cladding: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, stone shall be 50 mm thick, length and width dimensions of individual slabs within plus or minus 2 mm, from those specified.

2.4

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except complying with staining requirements of ASTM C 91 for not more than 0.03 percent water soluble
09600-3 Stonework

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

alkali. 2. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, non-staining, except graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve for 6 mm and narrower joints. a. For white pointing mortar and grout, use natural white sand or ground white stone. For colored aggregate pointing mortar and grout, use fine aggregate produced from natural sands or ground stone including marble, granite or other sound stone as selected to produce mortar color indicated.

b.

4.

Water: Potable, clear and free from deleterious materials which would impair the work.

B.

Grouts: 1. Ready mixed, cement based, consisting of cement, carefully selected fillers and additives to provide workability. Grouts shall have good adhesion to dry stone pieces and shall be so formulated to avoid drying, shrinkage and cracking. Mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Color and shade of grouts shall be as directed by the Engineer.

C.

Control Joints: 1. Form control joints to allow for movement in the floor at locations recommended by the manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. Fill control joints with elastomeric material recommended by the manufacturer. No control joints material shall be allowed to project above the finished surface level.

D.

Anchors and Attachments: 1. Provide required anchors and attachments of type and size to support the tiles from the following metals for conditions and anchors indicated below: a. Stainless Steel for Wall Cladding: Type 304, for anchors, dowels and clamps in direct contact with stone. Cast or Malleable Iron: For adjustable inserts embedded in concrete and not in direct contact with stone. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: For anchor bolts, nuts and washers not in direct contact with stone; comply with ASTM A 307, Grade A, for material and ASTM C 153, Class C for galvanizing. For steel plates shapes and bars not in direct contact with stone; comply with ASTM A 36 for material and ASTM A 123 for galvanizing. Fixing devices shall be provided by a specialized firm as approved by the Engineer.

b.

c.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09600-4

Stonework

2.

Dove-tail Slots: Where indicated, furnish dove-tail slots with filler strips, of slot size required to receive anchors provided, fabricated from gage 22 galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 446, Designation G-90.

E.

Accessories: 1. Setting Buttons: Resilient plastic buttons, with no staining effect on the tiles, sized to suit joint thickness and bed depth of stone work involved without intruding into required depths of joint sealants or causing third-side adhesion between sealant an setting button. Sealer for Floors: Colorless, slip and stain resistant sealer which will not affect color or physical properties of stone surface, as recommended by sealer and by stone manufacturer for application indicated.

2.

3.

Cleaner: Provide cleaners of proper formulation for kinds of stone, finishes and applications indicated, as recommended by the stone manufacturer and if sealer specified by sealer manufacturer. Do not use acid-type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds containing caustic or harsh fillers except where expressly approved by the stone manufacturer for type of condition involved.

2.5

FABRICATION A. Fabricate as shown and as detailed on approved shop drawings. Provide holes and sinkages, cut or drilled for anchors, fasteners, supports and lifting devices, as shown and as necessary to secure stone work in place. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, openings and similar spaces and features as required for contiguous work also coordinate with Drawings and approved shop drawings showing contiguous work. Cut accurately to shape and dimension shown on the shop drawings. Dress joints straight and at right angles to face, unless otherwise indicated. Cut to provide joint width as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Field cutting is not allowed. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate stone to the patterns indicated on Drawings and in accordance with approved shop drawings.

B.

C.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Clean stone before setting by scrubbing with fiber brushes and thoroughly drenched with water. Stone work shall be done by experienced workmen of the trade employing skilled stone fitters at the site for necessary field cutting as stone is set. Where stone will come in contact with ferrous metal surfaces, apply an approved anti-corrosion paint on the metal surfaces prior to setting as well as using approved rust inhibitors as pre-primers after primary preparation.
09600-5 Stonework

B.

C.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

D.

Set stone work in accordance with Drawings and approved shop drawings for the stone work and provide expansion joints where required. Do not use stone units with chips, cracks, voids, stains or any other defects that might be visible in the finished work. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for expansion and control joints of width and at locations indicated, sealant material complying with the requirements of Section 07920 Sealants and Caulking.

E.

F.

3.2

INSTALLATION - FLOORS A. Setting of Floors in Portland Cement Mortar Bed:

1.

Saturate concrete subfloor with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed. Apply slush coat of cement grout over surface of concrete subfloor about 15 minutes prior to placing of setting bed. Limit area to avoid its drying out prior to placing of setting bed. Slush coat shall be properly mixed and shall not exceed the thickness of 1.5 mm. Mix setting bed in proportions by volume of one part of cement to 3 parts of sand (measured in damp loose condition) to the quantity of water to produce a stiff mixture with a moist surface when setting bed is ready to receive flooring. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness indicated to produce sub-grade elevations required for accurate setting of tiles to finished floor elevations shown. Mix and place only the amount that can be covered with prior to initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove and discard setting bed which has reached initial set prior to the placing of tiles. Butter backs of flooring units with skim coat of neat cement and water just prior to placing it on bed. Tamp flooring units until firmly bedded to proper finished floor elevations indicated also set and level each unit in single operation. Do not return to areas already set and disturb for leveling purposes prior to initial set of cement bed.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

B.

Grouting - Floors 1. Mix grout in proportion, by volume of one part Portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate (measured in damp loose conditions). Except for thin joints with fine sand, reduce fine aggregate proportion to one part. Add liquid admixtures in proportion and concentration as per manufacturer's recommendations. Select grout materials to match the approved samples. Grout joints in flooring units, except at expansion and control joints indicated
09600-6 Stonework

2.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

to be filled with sealant. Fill all gaps to produce a finished joint which is uniform in color, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots. 3. 4. 3.1 Remove grout spillage from face of stone as the work progresses. Cure grout by maintaining in a moist condition for not less than 7 days.

REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Units which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged shall be removed and replaced. Clean stone work after completion using clean water and stiff bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid type cleaning agents or compounds with caustic or harsh fillers. Apply sealer to cleaned interior flooring in compliance with sealer manufacturer's instructions.

B.

C.

3.2

PROTECTION A. Provide proper procedures to protect the stone work from collapse, deterioration, discoloration or damage during construction and until the acceptance of work.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09600-7

Stonework

SECTION 09660 RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Resilient tile flooring and skirting in designated rooms and areas.

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM D 257 - Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of Insulating materials ASTM E 84 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Submit shop drawings and product technical data. Provide seaming plan and location of joints. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available. Submit 2 samples, in actual size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Submit cleaning and maintenance data include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

D.

E. F.

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the Manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture. Store materials in weathertight and dry storage facility. Protect from damage from handling, weather, and construction operations before, during and after installation.

B.

1.5

GUARANTEE A. Submit a written guarantee signed by Contractor and Manufacturer for a period of 1 year from the date of substantial handover. Guarantee shall cover repair and replacement of defective material and workmanship.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09660-1

Resilient Flooring

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install resilient flooring and accessories in strict compliance with manufacturer recommendations and instructions. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operation, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring on concrete slabs until slabs have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by Manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL TILE FLOORING MATERIALS: A. Technical Features: 1 Construction: Non asbestos, homogenous vinyl flooring with foam interlayer and polyurethane reinforcement in compliance with DIN 16952 or 16952/T3. Color: As indicated on Drawings and approved by the Engineer. Size: 300 x 300 mm, unless otherwise indicated in the drawings. Total Thickness: 2 mm Abrasion/Thickness Loss: 0.2 mm maximum; in compliance with DIN 51963 Wear by Castor: Suitable; in compliance with the DIN 54324 Flame Spread: Class B1 in accordance with DIN 4102 as well as BS 476: Part 7 Chemical Resistance: Resistant; in compliance with DIN 51958 Light Fastness: > Level 6; in compliance with the DIN 53388 Electrical Resistance: 1011 Ohm in compliance with ASTM D 257. Color and Texture: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturers standard range of colors and textures.

2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11

B.

Vinyl Base: Manufacturer's standard weldable vinyl base with color matching the floor covering. Provide the Manufacturer's matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units. Adhesive: Manufacturers standard waterproofed adhesive; suitable for vinyl flooring and substrate conditions. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining primer; type as recommended by tile manufacturer.
09660-2 Resilient Flooring

C.

D.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

E. F.

Leveling Compound: Latex-type compound; as recommended by tile manufacturer. Divider Strips: If indicated between different floor finishes, divider strip shall be 32 x 3 mm thick bronze or aluminum, angle or T-Type with appropriate anchoring devices to substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUB-FLOOR PREPARATION A. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicate acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete slab to determine that concrete surfaces are sufficiently, cured dried and ready to receive flooring. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring Manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with Manufacturer's directions. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring Manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. B. Install flooring in strict compliance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Tightly cement flooring to sub-base without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks or other surface imperfections. Hand roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals and into closets and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking device. Accessories: Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install resilient edge strip at edge of resilient flooring which would otherwise be exposed.

C. D.

E.

3.3

CLEANING A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring Manufacturer. Protect installed flooring which would otherwise be exposed. Immediately before acceptance of building, thoroughly clean resilient floors and accessories with neutral cleaners as recommended by Manufacturer and machine buff to a high sheen. END OF SECTION

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09660-3

Resilient Flooring

SECTION 09671 RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resinous flooring including heavy duty polyurthane based floor screed parking grage, service rooms and areas, store, trash areas, and areas subject to the direct Sun light as indicated on drawings.

1.2

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each resinous flooring system indicated. Samples for Verification: Of each resinous flooring system required, 150 mm square, applied by Installer for this Project to a rigid backing, in color, texture, and finish indicated. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the resinous flooring's reaction to chemicals and other reagents and substantiating compliance with requirements.

B.

C.

D.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized in installing resinous flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer.

1.4

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.

B.

1.5

PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring installation.
09671-1 Resinous Flooring

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

B.

Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Polyurthane Based Floor Screed: Shall be a four component system specially formulated to withstand shock and chemical attack. Screed shall be trowel-applied at 5 mm thickness or as shown on drawings. Products complying with other equivalent standards than mentioned herein shall be acceptable if meeting the specifications requirements. 1 Physical Properties: a. b. c. d. e. f. 100 N/mm2. 25 N/mm2. 15 N/mm2. No damage or deterioration Resistance to fungal growth (ASTM G21) MIL-D- Passes 3134 Resistance to elevated temperature (1150 C) No flow, softening, chalking of cracking Compressive Strength (BS 6319:Part 2 1985): Flexural Strength (BS 6319:Part 3 1990): Tensile Strength (BS 6319:Part 7 1985): Impact Resistant (BS8204):

Chemical Properties: Resistant to a wide range of chemicals at 250 C, as follows: a. b. c. d. e. Inorganic Organic Cleaning aids and detegents Petrol Electromechnical solutions (Copper Sulphate, Zinc Sulphate)

B.

Concrete Screed: Refer to Section 09220.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to screed manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for resinous flooring application. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminates incompatible with resinous flooring.
09671-2 Resinous Flooring

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

1.

Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Cleaned substrates shall be at least 14 days old at 350 C before epoxy screed shall be applied.

2.

3.

C.

Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to flooring manufacturer's written instructions. Polyurthane based floor screed: Mix components, prepare materials and lay screed to primed area according to manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Use primer approved by the screed manufacturer. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

D.

E.

F.

3.2

APPLICATION A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.

1 2 3
B.

Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion. Cure flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.

Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Apply troweled or screeded body coat(s) in thickness indicated. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and roughness. Apply sealing or finish coat(s), including grout coat, if any, of type recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish indicated. Apply in number of coats and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09671-3

Resinous Flooring

3.3

CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer. Clean the flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.

B.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09671-4

Resinous Flooring

SECTION 09680 CARPET

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall-to-wall carpet and the accessories for prayer rooms as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES B. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 903/1994 SASO 904/1994 Determination of thickness of pile above the backing Determination of number of tufts and/or loops per unit length and per unit area Carpets: Determination of mass of effective pile per unit area that can be shown away from the backing. Determination of mass of total pile yarn per unit area Determination of measured surface pile density and measured pile fiber volume ration

SASO 906/1994 SASO 909/1994 SASO 910/1994

SASO 1167/1997 - Woven carpets SASO 1168/1997 - Methods of testing woven carpets. C. AATCC - American Association of Textile Colorists and Chemists AATCC 30 - Anti-Fungal Activity Assessment on Textile Materials; Mildew and Rot Resistance of Textile Materials AATCC 100 - Assessment of Anti-Bacterial Finishes on Textile Materials. AATCC 134 - Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets D. CCC - Carpet Cushion Council Traffic Classifications - 1990 E. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM C 423 Test Method for Sound Absorption of Acoustical Materials by Reverberation Room Method

ASTM D 1335 - Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Coverings
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09680-1

Carpet

ASTM D 2859 - Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials ASTM D 3574 - Method of Testing Flexible Cellular Materials - Slab, Bonded, and Molded Urethane Foams. ASTM E 648 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials

ASTM E 662 -

F.

DOC - Federal Standard, Department of Commerce FF 1-70 - Methenamine Pill Test.

G.

UL - Underwriters Laboratories UL 992 - Smoke Chamber Test.

H.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NFPA 253 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source NFPA 255 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance and smoke development characteristics. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at special condition. Submit 400 x 400 mm samples of each type, color, texture, and pattern of carpet to be used for the work. Manufacturer's standard color chart. Certificate of compliance.

B.

C.

D. E. 1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside wellventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures,
09680-2 Carpet

B.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 20 degree C at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Submit a written 1 year guarantee, starting from substantial handover of project, for all items specified under this section, signed by manufacturer and the Contractor, against defective material and workmanship.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Carpet installer shall have at least five years successful experience in carpet installation similar in size and type to the installation for this Project. Installer shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70 Rating: Pass Test Method: ASTM E 84 Flame Spread: 75 or less Smoke Developed: 450 or less

B.

C. 1.7

Dimensional Stability: Maximum variance not exceeding plus or minus 0.02 percent.

PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Examine the substrate and conditions under which the carpet is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Protection: Protect carpet from soiling and damage during transit, storage, and installation. Temperature: Temperature in the area to be carpeted shall be within the manufacturer's recommended range.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carpet - General:

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09680-3

Carpet

1.

Carpet type, pattern, color shall be as indicated on Drawings or approved by the Engineer. Carpet shall be suitable for prayer areas with prayer line marking built-in within carpet. Carpet shall have the following characteristics as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Construction: Composition: Pile Height: Total Pile Weight: Total Height: Total Weight: Density: Cut pile, Plain or Design. 80% Wool, 20 % Nylon. 7.5 mm. 1200 grams per m2. 10 mm 1850 grams per m
2

2.

Width 46 per 10 cm (11.6 per inch) Length 31.5 per 10 cm (8 per inch).

h.

Static Electricity: Anti-Static compound (Suppress static electricity below 2.5 to 3.5 kV). Flammability Rate Requirement: Based on (or equivalent to) any of the following: 1) 2) U.S. Pill test, D.O.C FF 1-70 (ASTM D2859-70T). U.S. Tunnel test (ASTM E 84 70) Flame Spread Rate Class A 0-25/Class B 26-75. B.S. 4790 equal to D.O. C FF 1-70. Radiant panel 0.25 watts/cm2.

i.

3) 4) j.

Color Fastness: 6 to light according to BS 1006 and 4 to water, rubbing and/or shampoo. Wear: No more than 10% face yarn loss in 5 years normal use.

k. B.

Accessories: 1. Carpet Edge Guard: Aluminum with fold down edge and concealed griper teeth; minimum 35 mm wide punched anchorage flange, anodized aluminum finish. Seaming Tape: Hot-melt adhesive tape as recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams.

2.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09680-4

Carpet

3.

Adhesives: Water resistant, non-staining and as recommended by the carpet manufacturer to comply with the flammability requirements of the installed carpet.

C.

Concrete Screed: Refer to Section 09200 LATH AND PLASTER.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Measurement: Measure each space to receive carpet as a basis of supplying and cutting the carpet. Do not scale Drawings or calculate sizes from dimensions shown. Patch holes and cracks, and level to a smooth surface. Seal powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. Vacuuming: Immediately prior to carpet installation, vacuum substrate and remove all deleterious substances which would interfere with the installation or be harmful to the work. Substrate: Prior to installation of the carpet, ascertain that floors are completely dry to prevent accumulation of moisture under carpet, and that the temperature of the premises is proper to prevent sag, buckle, and shrinkage of carpet after installation.

B.

C.

D.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. Carpet shall be installed on concrete screed as shown on drawings. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming tape to provide sufficient strength for stretching where carpet length is greater than 20 feet. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple-free, taut, trim edges; secure to stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater than 20 feet. For bonded application, glue carpet to substrate using approved adhesive materials,
09680-5 Carpet

B. C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations. I. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming tape. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with carpet manufacturer's written instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.

3.3

CLEANING A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. Vacuum clean carpet.

B.

C. 3.4

PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and the Engineer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09680-6

Carpet

SECTION 09685 CARPET TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. 1.2 Carpet tiles as indicated on Drawings. Related accessories required for proper installation.

REFERENCES A. AATCC AATCC 30 American Association of Textile Colorists and Chemists Anti-Fungal Activity Assessment on Textile Materials; Mildew and Rot Resistance of Textile Materials. Assessment of Anti-Bacterial Finishes on Textile Materials. Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets. American Society for Testing and Materials Test Method for Sound Absorption of Acoustical Materials by Reverberation Room Method Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Coverings Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials Method of Testing Flexible Cellular Materials - Slab, Bonded, and Molded Urethane Foams Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

AATCC 100 AATCC 134 B. ASTM ASTM C 42

ASTM D 1335 ASTM D 2859

ASTM D 3574

ASTM E 648

ASTM E 662

C.

DOC - Federal Standard, Department of Commerce FF 1-70 - Methenamine Pill Test.

D.

UL - Underwriters Laboratories UL 992 - Smoke Chamber Test.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09685-1

Carpet Tiles

E.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NFPA 253 Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

NFPA 255

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of carpet tile material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance and smoke development characteristics. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. Show installation details at special condition. Submit 400 x 400 mm samples of each type, color, texture, and pattern of carpet tiles to be used for the work. Manufacturer's standard color chart. Certificate of compliance.

B.

C.

D. E. 1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside wellventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 20 degree C at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored.

B.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit a written 2 years guarantee, starting from substantial handover of Project, for all items specified under this section, signed by manufacturer and the contractor, against defective material and workmanship.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Carpet tile installer shall have at least five years successful experience in carpet installation similar in size and type to the installation for this Project. Installer shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet tiles identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other equivalent testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
09685-2 Carpet Tiles

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Identify carpet tiles with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70 Rating: Pass Test Method: ASTM E 84 Flame Spread: 75 or less Smoke Developed: 450 or less Dimensional Stability: Maximum variance not exceeding plus or minus 0.02 percent. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Examine the substrate and conditions under which the carpet tiles are to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Protection: Protect carpet tiles from soiling and damage during transit, storage, and installation. Temperature: Temperature in the area to be carpeted shall be within the manufacturer's recommended range.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carpet Tiles - General: 1. Type, size, color and pattern of carpet tiles shall be as indicated on Drawings or approved by the Engineer. Carpet tiles shall have the following characteristics: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

2.

Construction: Gauge: Stitch Rate: Tuft Density: Fibre: Pile Weight: Backing: Total Weight: Thickness:

Low dense loop pile. 1/10th 40 1 per 10 cm. 158,000 2.5% per m . 100% Polyamide. 580 g/m2 Modified Bitumen with PP/PES underlay. 4600 g/m2 6.8 mm
2

09685-3

Carpet Tiles

j. k.

Static Electricity:

Permanently anti-static. Pass or comply with the following

Flammability Rate Requirement: tests 1) 2)

U.S. Pill Test, D.O.C. FF 1-70 (ASTM D2859-70T) U.S. Tunnel Test (ASTM E-84-70) Flame Spread Rate - Class A 0-25/Class B 26-75. B.S. 4790 equal to D.O.C FF 1-70. Radiant panel 0.25 watts/cm2.

3) 4) l. m.

Anti-microbial treated. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 2 percent at 20 degree C and Relative Humidity of 65 percent Colorfastness: 6 to light according to BS 1006 and 4 to water, rubbing and/or shampoo. Dimensional Stability: Excellent, meet requirements of BS 4682 and DIN 54318. Resistance to wear: 1) 2) Grade: Heavy contract.

n.

o.

p.

DIN (54326): Very slight fiber loss, very light flattening and change in structure after 300,000 revolutions. Lisson Test (DIN 54322): Weight loss neglible.

3) q.

Appearance Retention: 1) Dynamic loading (BS 4052/DIN 54319): Loss of thickness after 1000 impacts 0.8 mm. Static loading (BS 4939/DIN 54316): Thickness loss after 24 hours recovery only 0.4 mm. Castor chair suitability (DIN 54324): R = 3.6.

2)

3) B.

Concrete Screed: Refer to Section 09200 LATH AND PLASTER.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09685-4

Carpet Tiles

B.

Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 3 mm in 3 m. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and do not exhibit alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.

C.

3.2

PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, and other defects with sub-floor filler. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. Vacuum floor surface.

B. C. D. 3.3

INSTALLATION A. B. Install carpet tile and accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Integrate and blend carpet tiles from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. Cut carpet tiles straight. Fit carpet tiles tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. Lay out carpet tile to linear pattern. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. Carpet ties shall be installed on concrete screed as shown on drawings

C.

D. E. F. 3.4

CLEANING A. Remove adhesive from carpet tile surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet tiles where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. Vacuum clean carpet tiles.

B.

C. 3.5

PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and the Engineer, to ensure carpet tile are not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09685-5

Carpet Tiles

SECTION 09841 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. The Work under this Section shall consist of furnishing and installation of acoustical wall panels as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES: A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 423-90a: Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method ASTM E 84-96: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 548-93: Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence ASTM E 795-93: Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS: Provide spline-mounted acoustical wall panels with manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of fabric facing material, type as approved by Contracting Officer, laminated to core of rigid glass fiber board with a nominal density of 96-128 kg/m3; with long edges kerfed and rebated to receive splines. Nominal overall panel thickness shall be 19 mm with NCR of 0.80 determined by testing per ASTM C 423. Panels shall be UL listed and shall be of sizes shown on Drawings or approved by Contracting Officer. SPLINE MOUNTING ACCESSORIES: Shall be manufacturer's standard concealed stainless steel or extruded aluminum designed and fabricated for screw attachment to walls. Refer to I.D. Drawings and Specifications for material selection.

2.2

2.3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine the substrate, adjoining construction, and the conditions under which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09841-1

Acoustical Wall Panels

3.2

INSTALLATION: A. Install acoustic wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels. Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions of installation of panels using type of mounted accessories indicated. Remove and replace panels that are damaged and are unacceptable to the Contracting Officer.

B.

3.3

CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Cleaning: Upon completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of dust, dirt stains and other foreign material as per panel manufacturer's written instructions. Protection: Protect work during construction and up to handover of project to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

B.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09841-2

Acoustical Wall Panels

SECTION 09900 PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Painting materials complete with primers, sealers, fillers, stains and finish coats applied for exterior and interior areas as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 321 Industrial safety and health regulations - Hazardous materials - Paints - Part 1: Spray finishing using flammable and combustible materials Paint and varnishes Ready mixed oil-based paints for use on concrete and masonry. Paints and varnishes Gloss enamel (For interior and exterior surfaces) Paints and varnishes Paints and varnishes Examination and preparation of samples for testing Paints and varnishes Determination of the effect of heat Paints and varnishes - Determination of the effect of heat Paints and varnishes Scratch test Paints and varnishes Determination of resistance to water Water immersion method Paints and varnishes - Surface-Drying test - Ballotini method Paints and varnishes - Bend test - (Cylindrical mandrel) Paints and varnishes - Determination of resistance to humidity (Continuous condensation) Methods of test for paints and varnishes: Determination of hard drying time.
09900-1 Painting

SASO 470 SASO 471

SASO 472

SASO 473 SASO 474

SASO 475 SASO 476 SASO 477 SASO 478

SASO 592

SASO 593 SASO 780

SASO 1188
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

SASO 810 SASO 861

Paints and varnishes - Sampling equipment Methods of test for paints and varnishes: Preparation of test panels before coating. Methods of test for paints and varnishes: Determination of flash-point (Closed cup method). Priming paints. Alkyd based undercoating paints for general purposes. Aluminum paints for general purposes Paints and varnishes - Methods of testing glass beads for road marking paints

SASO 868

SASO 817 SASO 818 SASO 820 SASO 943

B.

FS - Federal Specifications P-W-158E TT-E-489G TT-E-506K TT-E-509B(2) Wax, General Purpose, Solvent Type Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (for Exterior and Interior Surfaces) Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss, Tints and White (for Interior Use) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd, Interior, Semi-gloss, White and Tints Enamel, Alkyd, Lusterless Enamel, Interior, Undercoat, White and Tints Filler, Wood, Paste Paint, Acrylic Emulsion; Exterior Primer Coating Exterior (undercoat for Wood, Ready-Mixed, White and Tints) Paint, Latex Base, Interior, Flat, White and Tints Paint, Alkyd, Odorless, Interior, Flat, White and Tints Paint, Alkyd Resin; Exterior Trim, Deep Colors Paint, Oil, (Alkyd-Oil) Wood Shakes and Rough Siding Paint, Polyvinyl Emulsion, Exterior Paint, Oil, Alkyd, Ready-Mixed, Medium Shades

TT-E-527C TT-E-543A(1) TT-F-336E TT-P-19C(2) TT-P-25E(2)

TT-P-29J(1) TT-P-30E TT-P-37D TT-P-52D(2) TT-P-55B(2) TT-P-81E

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09900-2

Painting

TT-P-641G(1)

Primer Coating; Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide (for Galvanized Surfaces) Primer Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type Primer Coating; Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide (for Galvanized Surfaces) Primer Coating, Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting, Lacquer Resisting Sealer, Surface, Varnish Type, Floor, Wood and Cork Shellac, Cut Stain, Oil, Semi-Transparent, Wood, Exterior Stain, Oil-Type, Wood, Interior Varnish, Oil, Rubbing (for Metal and Wood Furniture)

TT-P-645A TT-P-650C(1)

TT-P-664C(2) TT-S-176E(1) TT-S-300A TT-S-708A(2) TT-S-711C TT-V-86C(1) C.

SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council SP-6-63 SP-10-63T Commercial Blast Cleaning Near-White Blast Cleaning

D.

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM D 16 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products Consistency of Paints Using the Stromer Viscometer Standard Index of Methods for Testing Architectural Paints and Coatings Standard Guide for Painting Inspectors (Metal Substrates) Standard Guide for State and Institutional Purchasing of Plant Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material

ASTM D 562 ASTM D 2833

ASTM D 3276 ASTM D 3927

ASTM E 84 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical information including instructions for thinning, mixing, curing and touch-up. Manufacturer's standard color charts. Test Reports and certificates of compliance. Samples: Prior to beginning work, furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted.
09900-3 Painting

B. C. D.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Submit samples for the Engineer review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1. On 300 mm x 300 mm hardboard, provide 2 samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate actual conditions. Re-submit samples as requested by Engineer until acceptable sheen, color and texture is achieved. On wood surfaces, provide 2 samples 100 x 200 mm of natural and stained wood finish on actual wood types. Label and identify each as to location and application. On concrete masonry, provide two 100 mm square samples of masonry for each type of finish and color, defining filler, prime and finish coat. On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components, duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 9 m of surface, as direct, until required sheen, color and texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job.

2.

3.

4.

5. 1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: B. Name or title of material. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. Manufacturer's name. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number.

Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated o area and protect from moisture, direct sunlight and temperatures below 10 C and above limits recommended by the manufacturer. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in clean conditions, free of foreign materials and residue. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.

C.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide sealers, fillers, stain, undercoats and finish coats produced by same manufacturer. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09900-4

Painting

B.

Coordination of Work: Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

C.

1.6

JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not paint when air is dust-laden or when weather and temperature conditions are unsuitable. Do not paint exterior surfaces in damp or rainy weather. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations with respect to application and drying period temperatures. Apply water-based paints only when the moisture content of substrate is not more than 12% and the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 10oC and 32oC, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the moisture content of substrate is not more than 4% and the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air o o temperatures are between 7 C and 35 C, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not apply paint when relative humidity exceeds 85% or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

B.

C.

D.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Material Quality: Paints, coatings, and primers shall be ready-mixed at the manufacturer's plant and shall be delivered in sealed containers, labeled and identified. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Paints and finishes shall have Class A rating in accordance with ASTM E 84. Materials without manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. Use products of same manufacturer for succeeding coats. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. Color and Texture: 1. Exterior Painting: Color and texture of the exterior paint shall be as indicated on Drawings. Interior Painting: Colors, textures, and degree of luster will be as indicated on Interior Design Drawings and Interior Design Specifications. Color selection will include safety colors for hazards in accordance with ANSI Z53.1 Safety
09900-5 Painting

B.

C.

2.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. Tint prime and undercoats approximately to the shade of the final coat but with sufficient variation to distinguish them from the preceding coat. D. Mildewcide: Paints shall contain a mildewcide as recommended by the manufacturer. Solvents and Thinners: As recommended by the paint manufacturer.

E. 2.2

PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Exterior Paint Schedule: 1. Concrete, Plaster, and Masonry Smooth Finish: a. b. c. 2. Prime Coat Second Coat Finish Coat : Acrylic Primer Sealer based on Copolymer Resins. : Acrylic Copolymer Exterior Emulsion, Total Dry Film Thickness (DFT) 30 micron. : Same as Second Coat.

Ferrous Metals: a. b. c. Prime Coat Second Coat Finish Coat : Polyamide Cured Epoxy Primer, 50 micron (DFT). : Two Component Polyurethane, semi-gloss, 50 micron (DFT). : Same as Second Coat.

3.

Zinc-Coated Metals: a. b. c. Prime Coat Second Coat Finish Coat : Polyamide Cured Epoxy Primer, 50 micron (DFT). : Two Component Polyurethane, semi-gloss, 50 micron (DFT). : Same as Second Coat

4.

Painted Wood: a. b. c. d. e. Prime Coat Second Coat Third Coat Fourth Coat Finish Coat : Wood Primer based on Alkyd Resins. : Wood Filler based on Alkyd Resins. : Under coat based on Alkyd Resins. : Alkyd Enamel, semi-gloss, 30 micron (DFT). : Same as Fourth Coat.

5.

Natural Finish Wood: a. b. c. d. Prime Coat Second Primer Third Coat Finish Coat : Wood Stain based on Alkyd Resins. : Wood Stain based on Alkyd Resins. : Lacquer, semi-gloss, 25 micron (DFT) based on Urethane Alkyd Resins. : Same as Third Coat.

B.

Interior Paint Schedule: 1. Concrete, Plaster, Gypsum Board, Reinforced Decorative Gypsum and
09900-6 Painting

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Masonry: a. b. c. 2. Prime Coat Second Coat Finish Coat : Acrylic Primer Sealer based on Copolymer Resins. : Acrylic Copolymer Interior Emulsion, eggshell, Dry Film Thickness 25 micron (DFT). : Same as Second Coat.

Epoxy paint on cement screed floors and block and plaster walls: a. b. Prime Coat : As per epoxy paint manufacture recommendation. Second Coat: Two components polyamide cured epoxy paint with silica non-skid additive, Dry Film thickness 100 micron (DFT). Finish Coat: Same as for second coat.

c. 3.

Ferrous Metals: a. b. c. d. Prime Coat Second Coat Third Coat Finish Coat : Red Oxide Primer, 50 micron (DFT). : Under Coat Based on Alkyd Resins. : Alkyd Enamel, semi-gloss, 30 micron (DFT). : Same as Third Coat

4.

Zinc-Coated Metals: a. b. c. d. Prime Coat Second Coat Third Coat Finish Coat : Polyamide Cured Epoxy Primer, 50 micron (DFT). : Under coat Based on Alkyd Resins. : Alkyd Enamel, semi-gloss, 30 micron (DFT). : Same as third coat

5.

Painted and Natural Finish Wood: a. Same as specified in Exterior Paint Schedule.

6.

Exposed Metal Pipes, Ducts, and other Metal work: a. Same as specified in Exterior Paint Schedule for each type of metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine substrate and conditions under which painting will be performed. Proceed with the work only when conditions are satisfactory. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

B.

3.2

SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting
09900-7 Painting

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.

2.

Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints, and other irregularities with a filler suitable for the purpose and, after setting sand to a smooth finish. Prime surfaces not more than 8 hours after cleaning. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify the Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

3.

4.

5.

B.

Concrete, Masonry and Plaster Works: Prepare surfaces of concrete, concrete masonry cement plaster and gypsum plaster to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer and approved by Engineer. 1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, and allow to dry before painting.

2.

C.

Gypsum Board: Repair minor cracks and holes with finishing compound, and sand smooth after drying. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended know sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. Ferrous Metals: Clean non-galvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove mortar, plaster, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale and other
09900-8 Painting

D.

E.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council, before priming coat is applied. F. Shop-Primed Ferrous Surfaces: Remove grease, oil and other foreign substances with approved type of cleaner manufactured for the purpose. Exercise care to prevent damage to shop coat. Touch-up abraded or marred shop coats with paint used for priming. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Surfaces: Remove grease and oil with a cleaner manufactured for the purpose. Treat surfaces with a chemical compound such as a phosphoric acid wash. Remove the chemical compound completely with clean, fresh water.

G.

3.3

MATERIALS PREPARATION A. B. C. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density, stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

3.4

APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the type of material being applied. Do not exceed manufacturers recommended coverage per gallon. Apply materials with care to a uniform and proper film thickness, showing no runs, holidays, sags, crawls, or other defects. Apply with a minimum of brush marks. Finish surfaces shall be uniform in sheen, color and texture and match approved samples. Allow coats to dry thoroughly before succeeding coats are applied; allow a minimum of 24 hours between applications on any one surface unless otherwise specified by the paint materials manufacturer. Sandpaper undercoats on interior metal thoroughly and uniformly to provide a smooth, even surface for finish coats. Apply paint by brush, roller, spray, or other acceptable practice in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the type of material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep wool as recommended by the paint manufacturer for material and texture required. Brush-out and work all brush coats into the surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Neatly draw all primer or first coats, unless otherwise permitted to use mechanical applicators. Except as otherwise specified, apply a prime coat to material that is required to be painted or finished.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09900-9

Painting

G.

Apply the first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. Number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Sand between each enamel and varnish coat application with fine sandpaper or rub surfaces with pumice stone where required to produce an even, smooth surface in accordance with the paint manufacturer's directions. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit thorough drying. Do not re-coat until paint does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and the application of loss of adhesion of the undercoat. Paint type, color, surface treatment shall be as scheduled. Provide finish coats that are compatible with prime paints used. When undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, apply additional coats until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Insure that all surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Exposed surfaces are defined as those areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles and similar items are in place in areas scheduled to be painted. Where visible through registers or grilles, paint interior surfaces of ducts and void spaces with a flat, non-specular black paint. Paint the back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match the exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges the same as the exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Provide dry film thickness for each finish type, including prime and finish coats, not less than total dry film thickness as specified in painting schedule. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surfaces imperfections. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
09900-10 Painting

H.

I.

J. K.

L.

M. N. O. P. Q.

R.

S.

T.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

U.

Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or re-paint work not in compliance with specified requirements.

3.5

CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Clean-Up:

1.

During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paintspattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch otherwise damage finished surfaces.

2.

B.

Protection: 1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and re-painting, as acceptable by the Engineer. Provide Wet Paint signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged and/or defaced surfaces.

2.

3.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

09900-11

Painting

SECTION 10165 TOILET PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet partitions and the related accessories as shown on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2.

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials B. UL - Underwriters Laboratory UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA LD-1 - Standard Publication for Laminated Thermosetting Decorative Sheets NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminate

1.3.

SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for the Engineer Representative review and approval: 1. Product data for physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame spread characteristics for type of partition and accessories specified. Shop drawings showing location and extent of partitions. Include plans, elevations, large-scale details of anchorages, and accessory items. Indicate unit conditions at openings, typical and special details, and location and installation requirements for hardware. Certificates of compliance signed by manufacturer of partitions certifying that the products comply with the specified requirements.

2.

3.

1.4.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled for identification of Manufacturer, brand name and contents.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10165-1

Toilet Partitions

B.

Store panels only on edge, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping in original undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1.5.

WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to replace partitions which fail in materials or workmanship within 1 year of date of substantial handing over.

1.6.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain partitions, mounting hardware and accessories all from one source from a single Manufacturer. Fire Performance: Partitions shall have flame spread of 25 or less and smoke development of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

B.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Toilet Partitions: Floor-supported type, constructed of 12 mm thick solid phenolic core consisting of multiple sheets of resin-impregnated kraft paper and matte finish colored melamine facing sheets fused together at high temperature and pressure to produce solid phenolic doors, stiles, pilasters and panels of sizes as shown on Drawings. Color shall be as selected and approved by the Engineer from the manufacturer standard range of colors. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer standard brackets for panel assembly as well as connection to adjacent walls. Brackets shall be stainless steel, type 302 or 304 in accordance with ASTM A 167, satin finished. Door Hardware and Accessories: Heavy-duty grade, stainless steel, type shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Anchorage and Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the following: 1. For Concealed Anchors: provide hot-dip galvanized steel or any other rustresistant protective-coated steel. For Exposed Anchors and Fasteners: Provide stainless steel, type 304, ASTM A 167. Theft-resistant (one way) type heads and nuts shall be provided for exposed anchorage.

B.

C.

D.

2.

2.2

FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels and pilasters fabricated for the partition system.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10165-2

Toilet Partitions

B. C.

Panels and Door Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings. Provide floor-supported pilasters to secure structural carrying members. Provide anchorage devices complete with standard hex nuts, lock washers, threaded rods and leveling adjustment nuts as required. Manufacturer's Standard hardware for each compartment in the partition system shall be furnished as follows: 1. 2. 3. Hinges: Cut-out inset type. Latch and Keeper: Surface-mounted latch unit. Coat Hook and Bumper: Manufacturer's Standard unit as a combined hookbumper.

D.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions where toilet partitions and related items are to be installed and remedy any conditions affecting proper installation and completion of work. Proceed with installation after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION B. General: Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb and leveled with panels laid out as indicated on Drawings. Provide maximum clearance of 1/2 inch between stiles and panels, 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls stirrup brackets using 2 brackets as a minimum. Locate holes for anchorage of wall brackets at tile joints. Anchor pilasters to floor using Manufacturer's Standard devices. Adjust bottom of door with bottom of pilasters when doors are in the closed position. Hardware shall be adjusted and lubricated for proper operation after installation as follows: 1. Hinges for In-Swing Doors: Set on to hold open approximately 30o from closed position when unlatched. Hinges for Out-Swing Doors: Set on to return to the fully closed position.

C.

D.

E.

2. 3.3

CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Protect units so that there will be no indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance. Perform final adjustment to anchoring devices, door hardware, and other operating parts of the partition assembly just prior to final inspection.
10165-3 Toilet Partitions

B.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

C.

Clean partition surfaces and clean adjacent surfaces soiled by work of this section. Avoid use of abrasive cleaners or solutions containing corrosive solvents. Use cleaning materials recommended by the Manufacturer. Replace damaged units that cannot be satisfactory field repaired as directed by the Engineer.

D.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10165-4

Toilet Partitions

SECTION 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Extruded aluminum louvers, louver screens and vents as shown on Drawings.

REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. A. SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANIZATION (SASO) SASO 79 Aluminum and aluminum alloys products for architectural application Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural Sections. Testing methods for aluminum and aluminum alloys products for building purposes Part 1: Sheets, strips, bars and structural Sections.

SASO 80

B.

AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL, INC. (AMCA) AMCA 500-89 AMCA 501-93: (Revised 1994): Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers Application Manual for Air Louvers

C.

AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA) AAMA 603.8-92 (Revised to Include 9/14/83 Addendum): Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum

D.

AMERICAN STANDARD FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM B 209-95 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric] Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes [Metric]

ASTM B 209M-95

ASTM B 221-95a

ASTM B 221M-95a

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10200-1

Louvers and Vents

E.

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) AWS D1.2-90 Structural Welding CodeAluminum

F.

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAAMM) Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products, 1988

1.3

DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and channels in jambs and mullions.

B.

1.4

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure of 25 lbf/sq. ft. (1200 Pa), acting inward or outward Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects: a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections; and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free area for each size indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.

C.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10200-2

Louvers and Vents

D.

Samples for Verification: Of each type of metal finish required, prepared on Samples of same thickness and material indicated for final Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of louvers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to AMCA 500 and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program.

E.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish. Welding Standards: As follows: 1. 2. Comply with AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.

B.

C.

SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 1. 2. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

D.

Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10200-3

Louvers and Vents

inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.2

FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 1830 mm o.c., whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units, provide horizontal mullions, unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where indicated or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view; unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

B. C.

D. E.

F.

G.

2.3

FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and blades. Horizontal Louvers: Either drainable- or non-drainable-blade type complying with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Louver Depth: Frame Thickness: Blade Thickness: Performance Requirements: 150 mm, unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 mm. 2.06 mm As indicated on shop drawings.

B.

2.4

LOUVER SCREENS A. B. General: Provide louvers with screens at locations indicated. General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following requirements:
10200-4 Louvers and Vents

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

1. 2. C.

Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. Screening Type: Bird screening, unless otherwise indicated.

Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 150 mm from each corner and at 300 mm o.c. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements: 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh.

D.

2. 3.

E.

Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: As follows: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 12.7-mm square mesh, 1.6-mm wire.

2.5

FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish louvers after assembly. Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard powder-coated finish, 60 - 80 micron thick unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. C.

2.6

PREPARATION A Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
10200-5 Louvers and Vents

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

C.

Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.

D.

E.

F.

G.

3.3

ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by the Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.

B.

C.

D.

E.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10200-6

Louvers and Vents

SECTION 10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards for columns and walls as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM D 256 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Plastic and Electrical Insulating Materials Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric] Specification for General Requirements for Wrought Copper and Copper-Alloy Rod, Bar, Shapes and Forgings

ASTM D 635

ASTM E 84

ASTM A 240/A 240M-01

ASTM B 36/B 36M-01

ASTM B 221-00

ASTM B 221M-00

ASTM B 249/B 249M-01

ASTM D 256-00

Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics (Reapproved 2001): Practices for Evaluating Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents the

ASTM D 543-95

ASTM D 635-98

Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10260 - 1

Corner Guards

ASTM D 1784-99a

Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds Specification for Extruded and Compression Molded Shapes Made from Polycarbonate (PC) Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence

ASTM D 6098-97

ASTM E 84-01

ASTM E 329-00b

ASTM E 548-94

B.

ANSI - American National Standards Institute ANSI A208.1-1999 ANSI A208.2-1994 APA APA PS2-92 Particleboard Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) The Engineered Wood Association Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels

C.

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BHMA A156.6-2001 Architectural Door Trim (ANSI)

D.

Code of Federal Regulations 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D-2001 National Emission Coatings Volatile Organic Compound Standards for Architectural

E.

Forest Stewardship Council FSC 1.2-00 Principles and Criteria

F.

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. 1988.

G.

National Fire Protection Association NFPA 255-00 Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10260 - 2

Corner Guards

H.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL 723-96 (Rev. 2001) Safety Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems

UL 2079-98 (Rev. 2000) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.

Submit shop drawings for products and installation complete with written installation procedures. Submit full size samples of corner guard, colors and hardware for approval.

B. 1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Package in standard containers and methods to withstand damage to containers and products during handling and shipping. Store products off ground in a sheltered area and away from potential damage.

B. 1.5

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Corner guards to resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without permanent damage.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Firm with 5 years of documented experience in the manufacture and application of products specified herein.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Corner Guards: 1. 2. 3. Type: Surface-mounted column and wall corner guards. Size and Location: As indicated on Drawings. Construction: Manufacturers standard fabricated from heavy duty, high impact resistant, extruded EPDM rubber with excellent ozone and weather resistance. Finish: Matte and color shall be as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's product range of colors.

4.

B.

Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer and as appropriate to component and substrate.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10260 - 3

Corner Guards

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. 3.2 Verify site conditions. Verify that rough-in for components are correctly sized and located.

INSTALLATION A. B. Install Corner Guards after completion of painting in the assigned areas. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position.

3.3

ADJUSTING A. Clean finished surfaces of products and leave free from dirt, dust, grease and other foreign matter. Replace units that are damaged with new products as directed by the Royal Commission and at no additional cost.

B.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10260 - 4

Corner Guards

SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. 1.2. Floor support stringer framing system. Removable floor panels. Fascia panels and stairs System electrostatic grounding.

REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.3.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Pedestals: Maximum axial load of 4.5 kN on 25 mm2 without permanent deformation. Ultimate Strength shall not be less than twice design load. Floor Panels: Conform to the following: 1. 2. 3. Uniformly Distributed Load: 12 kN/m . Maximum Deflection: 2.4 mm Concentrated load of 6.9 MPa at any location with maximum deflection of 2 mm. Ultimate Strength: Not less than twice design load. Flame Spread Requirement shall conform to one of the following: C. Class 1 in accordance with BS 476; Part 7 Class A in accordance with ASTM E 84 F 30 in accordance with DIN 4102
2

B.

4. 5.

Lateral Stability: Design system for lateral stability in all directions, with or without panels in place. Grounding: Ground resistance for areas provided with raised access flooring shall be in accordance with the recommendations of Computer/Equipment manufacturer(s) and shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 99.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10270-1

Access Flooring

1.4.

SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings indicating floor layout, interruptions to grid, special sized panels, panels requiring drilling or cut-out for services, appurtenances or interruptions, edge details, elevation differences and stairs. Submit product data for grid system, panels, and accessories. Submit 2 samples of floor grid and panel illustrating finishes and color. Submit manufacturer's certificate showing that products meet or exceed specified design strength and electrical resistance requirements. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data including recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.

B. C. D.

E. F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Pedestals: Steel with flat bottom base plate, threaded supporting rod, vibration-proof lock nut to permit adjustment. Pedestals shall have the manufacturer's standard finish. Pedestal to achieve finished floor elevation as indicated on Drawings. Frame Grid Stringers: Continuous type, prepared for loose installation; consisting of steel channels, box, or tee sections.

B. C.

2.2

PANEL COMPONENTS A. Floor Panels: Particle board high density composite core laminated with galvanized sheet steel structurally bonded with thermosetting adhesive. Panels shall have protective edge trim on all edges. Floor Panel Size: 600 x 600 mm. Panel Thickness: 32 mm (Minimum). Floor Panel Finish: Carpet tiles. Floor Panel Finish Adhesive: Waterproof, type recommended by floor finish manufacturer. Fascia Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum facing panels including corner pieces, trims, reinforcing, and clip angles. Stairs: Same materials, structural strength, and construction as floor panels with flush aluminum cover plates.

B. C. D. E.

F.

G.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10270-2

Access Flooring

2.3

ACCESSORIES A. Provide manufacturer standard electrical sockets, cable trays, wall connection(s) as indicated on Drawings and as required for proper installation. Electrostatic Grounding Connectors: Solid copper. Cable Cutout Protection: Extruded polyvinyl chloride or neoprene edging, 3/8 inch thick, self-extinguishing. Panel Lifting Device: Provide recommended manufacturer standard type. Gaskets: Closed cell sponge rubber, preformed to suit. Edge Trim: Extruded plastic angles or channels. Sealant: Conform to the requirements specified in Section 07900 - SEALANTS.

B. C.

D. E. F. G. 2.4

FINISHES A. Exposed Metal Surfaces: Baked enamel finish, color shall be as selected by Engineer from manufacturers standard range. Carpet Tiles: Refer to Section 09681 CARPET TILES.

B. 2.5

FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. B. C. Floor Panel Flatness: Plus or minus 0.02 inch in any direction. Floor Panel Width or Length From Specified Size: Plus or minus 0.02 inch. Floor Panel Squareness: Plus or minus 0.03 inch difference between opposite diagonal dimensions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. Verify that surfaces and openings are ready to receive work. Verify field measurements are as shown on approved shop drawings. Verify that required sub-floor utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10270-3

Access Flooring

3.2

PREPARATION A. B. Clean substrate surfaces. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Secure pedestal base plate to subfloor with metal fasteners. Install additional pedestals where grid pattern is interrupted by room appurtenances and at cutouts. Install stringers and floor panels solidly on pedestals. Where required, install grilles or perforated panels. Seal field cuts of floor panels with edge trim. Cut holes in floor panels for installation of Owner's equipment as directed. Include cable cutout protection. Provide floor, and stairs with edge trim and end closures. Provide lateral braces at stair edges and other locations where a pedestal is not braced. Provide positive electrical earth grounding of entire floor assembly.

D. E. F. G.

H.

I. 3.4

FASCIA PANELS A. B. C. Install fascia panels at exposed sides and stair risers. Secure panels to clip angles attached to subfloor and edge of floor panels. Install metal trim at intersection of facia panels and access floor and at abutting walls and columns.

3.5

ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Out of Level Tolerance: 1/16 inch in 10 ft

3.6

ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Adjust pedestals to achieve a level floor and to assure adjacent floor panel surfaces are flush. Clean exposed surfaces of all components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect finished installation as required.

B.

C.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10270-4

Access Flooring

D. E.

Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. Advise Engineer if flooring has been overloaded after completion and prior to Substantial Performance.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10270-5

Access Flooring

SECTION 10431 SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.2. Panel signs. Dimensional characters (letters and numbers). Illuminated characters (letters and numbers). Directories. Signage accessories.

SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: For each product indicated. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, wiring diagrams, and attachments to other Work. 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide message list for each sign.

2. C. 1.3.

Samples: For each sign material indicated that involves color selection.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR SIGNS A. Aluminum Backings 1. Lacquered aluminum backing sheets will be of sufficient thickness not to deform under installed conditions and be a minimum of 2.0 mm. Colors as selected by the Engineer.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10431 - 1

Signs

2.2

TEXT, PICTOGRAMS AND GRAPHICS. A. B. Text pictograms and graphics shall be as shown on drawings. Text, pictogram and graphics will be screen printed. All interior signs shall be ADA compliant, including raised letters, braille and nonglare finish. Character recognition including type, proportion and contrast shall conform to the ADAAG. Mounting heights shall be as per ADAAG stipulations. Non-Illuminated Signs: Signs for interior room designations, directions and emergency contact signs shall be aluminum complying with ASTM B 209 unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

C.

2.3

PANEL SIGNS A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of 5005H15. Frames: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply with the following requirements for materials and corner conditions: 1. 2. D. Material: Corner Condition: Aluminum. Square.

B.

C.

Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit panel sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in color matching background color of panel sign. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated on Drawings for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage. Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in the form of slide-in inserts. 1. Furnish paper and software for creating text and symbols for computers for Owner production of paper inserts. Furnish paper cut-to-size for changeable message insert.

E.

F.

2. G.

Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. 1. Engraved Metal: Color of text and graphics as indicated on drawings.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10431 - 2

Signs

2.4

DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of 6063-T5. Stainless-Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip: Provide stainless-steel plate, sheet, and strip, Type 302 or Type 304, complying with ASTM A 666. Cutout Characters: Cut characters from solid plate of thickness and metal indicated. Produce precisely cut characters with square cut, smooth, eased edges. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. D. Metal: Stainless steel

B. C.

Fabricated Characters: Fabricate letters and numbers to required sizes and styles, using metals and thicknesses indicated. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. 2. 3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: Not less than 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick for face and 0.031 inch (0.80 mm) thick for returns. Character Height: As indicated. Character Style: Helvetica in Arabic and English text.

E.

Illuminated Characters: Illuminate characters in manner indicated using manufacturer's standard lighting components including fluorescent tubes, transformers, insulators, and other components. Make provisions for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Coordinate electrical characteristics with those of power supply provided. 1. Backlighted Characters: Provide concealed lighting tubes of number indicated or required by size of characters. Include manufacturer's hardware for projection mounting of characters at distance from wall surface indicated.

2.5

MONOLITHIC SIGN AND CHANGEABLE-LETTER DIRECTORY (Type 1 Directory) A. Open-Face, Changeable-Letter Directory: Factory-fabricated unit consisting of manufacturer's standard, 25-mm deep perimeter frame surrounding fixed letterboard with open face. 1. Aluminum Perimeter Frame: Extruded aluminum with color anodic finish. a. Perimeter Frame Shape: Square. b. Perimeter Frame Corners: Square. c. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors and color densities. 2. Letterboard: Manufacturer's standard vinyl-covered panel material, with grooves spaced at 6 mm o.c. to receive changeable letters.
10431 - 3 Signs

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

a. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors. 3. Letters: Molded plastic with tabs for engaging grooves in letterboard. Provide manufacturer's standard assortment of not less than 500 letters for each size, style, color, and case required; include letters, numbers, and characters. Package letters in compartmentalized carrying box. a. b. c. d. 4. Height: 25 mm to top of capitals. Style: Helvetica in English and Arabic texts. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors. Case: Capitals and lowercase.

Header Panel: Illuminated; with translucent, acrylic sheet panel set within overall perimeter frame; with matching frame that separates header panel from letterboard. a. Graphic Content and Style: Provide header panel copy that complies with requirements indicated on Drawings for size, style, spacing, content, height, location, material, and colors. Color: As selected by Engineer from full range of industry colors.

b. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.6

Width: As indicated on Drawings. Height: As indicated on Drawings. Mounting: Surface mounted. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings

INTERACTIVE TOUCH SCREEN AND BUILDING LOCATOR (Type 2 Directory)) A. Manufacturers standard product to be interfaced with server and electronic data line as shown on drawings. Submit product data and shop drawings for review and approval of the Engineer.

2.7

ACCESSORIES A. Vinyl Film: Provide opaque non-reflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch (0.089-mm) minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface. Refer to I.D. drawings for mounting locations. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. Note Holders: Manufacturer's standard aluminum paper sheet holders.

B.

C.

D.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10431 - 4

Signs

2.8

ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Provide polyester powder coatings where indicated, 60 to 80 microns thick; color as selected by the Engineer.

2.9

STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. Mirror like Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8 finish.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. B. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.

Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 1. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

C.

Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 1. 2. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. Projected Mounting: surface indicated. Mount characters at projection distance from wall

D.

Illuminated Characters: 1. 2. 3. Run wires into wall construction through conduit. Exposed-to-view wiring or conduit on wall face is not permitted. Engage a licensed electrician to connect wiring to power source. END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10431 - 5

Signs

SECTION 10500 METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Locker units with hinged doors and built-in hardwood bench including related Work as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 446 Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality

1.3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Lockers: Surface mounted, double tier lockers complete with key cylinder locks.

1.4

MOCKUP A. B. Provide one full size locker, double tier with in selected color. Accepted unit may be incorporated into final Work.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit shop drawings and product technical data. Include locker types, sizes, configuration, layout of groups of lockers, accessories, and numbering plan. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide 2 color samples of each color scheduled for the Engineer approval.

C. D.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Conform to ASTM A 446; structural quality, Grade as selected by manufacturer for the intended application, galvanized, mild, cold-rolled, leveled steel; of the following minimum thicknesses: ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Body and Shelf: 24 gage Doors: 20 gage Door Inner Faces: 24 gage Door Frames: 16 gage
10500-1 Metal Lockers

2.2

Hinges: 14 gage Base, Top and Trim: 22 gage

ACCESSORIES A. Provide the following manufacturer standard accessories for each locker: B. Coat hanger bar Metal number plate.

Bench: Laminated Maple hardwood with corners rounded and sanded and clear lacquer finish. Bench shall be supported on H.D. steel brackets anchored to locker frame, as shown on Drawings. Size of bench and dimensions of steel supports shall be as shown on Drawings.

2.3

FABRICATION A. Locker Units: 300 mm wide x 450 mm deep x 750 mm high for each locker unit, in double tier and on steel frame extension, as detailed on Drawings. Bodies: Formed and flanged with stiffener ribs; electrically spot welded. Door Frame: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body. Doors: Welded inner and outer faces; thickness as appropriate for door leaf size; channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs. Finish edges smooth. Hinges: 3 for doors over 1050 mm high and 2 for doors under 1050 mm high. Weld securely to unit body and rivet to unit door. Provide manufacturer standard key cylinder lock. Provide 100 mm high steel bases. Finish edges smooth without burrs. Provide number plates.

B. C. D.

E.

F. G. H. I. 2.4

FINISHES A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with two coats of baked enamel. Color: As indicated on Drawings or if not, as selected by the Engineer from manufacturers standard color range. Locker door, body and bench supports of one color throughout.

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10500-2

Metal Lockers

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. 3.2 Verify bases are properly sized and located.

INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. Install lockers secure, plumb, square, and in line. Set on prepared base provided. Anchor lockers with appropriate anchor devices to suit materials encountered. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. Install end panels, filler panels, tops and bases to completely close off openings.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10500-3

Metal Lockers

SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet and washroom accessories for all toilets, bathrooms and washrooms as shown on drawings and specified herein. Accessories specified herein are only for the back of the house, for front of the

1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-Resistant Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. Specification for Steel, Commercial Quality. Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet,

ASTM A 167

ASTM A 269

ASTM A 366

ASTM A 527

Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality. Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Machines. Specification for Cartridge Brass Sheet, Strip, Plate, Bar and Disks (Blanks). Specification for Copper-Base Alloys in Ingot Form. Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded Brass) Extruded Shapes. Specification for Electro-Deposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. Specification for Flat Glass.

ASTM B 16

ASTM B 19

ASTM B 30 ASTM B 455

ASTM B 456

ASTM C 1036 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.

Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes.
10800-1 Toilet and Bath Accessories

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

B.

Samples: Full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. Setting Drawings: Where cut-outs are required in other works, provide templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cut-outs and for installation of anchorage devices.

C.

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled for identification of manufacturer, brand name and contents. Store materials as per manufacturer's written recommendations.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit a written guarantee signed by the manufacturer, agreeing to change the items that fail in material or workmanship within a period of 1 year from the date of substantial handing over.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Provide inserts and anchoring devices to be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other works to avoid delay. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Coordination: Coordinate the accessories locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of the accessories items.

B.

C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Bar stock: Conform to ASTM A 276, Type 304. Plates and Sheets: Conform to ASTM 167, Type 304. Pipes: Conform to ASTM A 312, Grade Type 304. Type of Finish: Polished, No. 4 unless otherwise indicated.

Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products conform to ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges conform to ASTM B 16; Castings conform to ASTM B 30.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10800-2

Toilet and Bath Accessories

C. D.

Bronze: Conform to ASTM B 36, Alloy 280 metal with satin chrome finish. Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, conforming to ASTM B 456, Type SC-2. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quantity conforming to ASTM A 366. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Conform to ASTM A 527, Designation G-60. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: conform to ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and devices of same material as accessory units. Where concealed, provide galvanized steel screws, bolts, and devices. Mirror Glass: Conform to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q , and 6 mm thick with silvering, electro-plated copper coating and protective organic coating.
2

E. F. G.

H.

I.

2.2

FABRICATION A. General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessories are not permitted, except where otherwise indicated. Wherever locks are required for a particular type of accessory, provide same keying throughout the project. Furnish two keys for each lock. Surface-Mounted Accessories: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 38 mm pin hinges of same metal as unit cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. Recessed Accessories: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed.

B.

C.

2.3

FABRICATED FITTINGS AND ACCESSORY ITEMS A. Single Robe Hook: 57 mm diameter, 80 mm projection from wall, chrome finish stainless steel Wall mounted Soap Dispenser: Top-filling surface-mounted liquid soap dispenser, stainless steel construction, chrome finish. Soap Dish Holder: In polished chrome finish Soap Dish: Satin glass finish Toilet Paper Holder: Stainless steel toilet paper holder, in chrome finish. Grab Bar: 32 mm diameter x 300 mm and 32 mm diameter x 1050 mm grab bar stainless steel construction, chrome finish.

B.

C. D. E. F.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

10800-3

Toilet and Bath Accessories

G. H.

Paper Towel Dispenser: Surface mounted stainless steel Perineal Spray: Gun pressure heavy duty complete with gun, hose and wall hook, polished chrome finish Clear Glass Facial Mirror: 1. 2. Mirror Size: Counter width x 1000 height. Plate glass one piece mirror shall be of quality grade No.1, not less than 6 mm thick, electrolytically copper backed complying with requirements of Section 08800-GLAZING. Back of the mirror shall have 20 mm thick plywood. Galvanized steel back shall have integral horizontal hanging brackets for mounting on concealed wall hangers and secured with concealed vandalproof screws in lower frame. Frameless mirrors shall have manufacturer's standard accessories as required for proper fixation. Clear Glass Facial Mirror: 400 x 600 mm clear glass facial mirror with one piece channel frame of stainless steel type 304, bright polish finish.

I.

3. 4.

5.

6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates, previously installed inserts and anchorages necessary for mounting of toilet and bath accessories, as well as other conditions under which installation is to occur, and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Install toilet and bath accessory units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using fasteners that are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of units. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated.

3.3

ADJUST AND CLEAN

A.

Adjust toilet and bath accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing the protective coatings.

B.

END OF SECTION
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800 10800-4 Toilet and Bath Accessories

SECTION 11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design, supply and installation of the following maintenance equipment as shown on drawings and specified herewithin.

1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 36 Structural Steel

ASTM A 123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A 307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners ASTM A 325 High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints ASTM A 441 High-Strength Low Alloy structural Manganese Vanadium Steel ASTM A 501 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B 221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes B. AWS - American Welding Society AWS B3.0 AWS D1.1 C. 1.3 Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification Structural Welding Code-Steel

ICBO Uniform Building Code (UBC)

SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for Engineer s review and approval: 1. Proposed design for maintenance equipment including the related construction details showing relation between the proposed equipment and adjacent areas as well as the required modifications. Connection and wiring diagrams as well as outline drawings. Manufacturer's technical data.
11010-1 Maintenance Equipment

2. 3.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

4. 5.

Operations and maintenance manuals. Certificates of Compliance: For material and strength for wire ropes and hooks. Test reports. List of spare parts and special tools.

6. 7. 1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Shipping container(s) shall be provided as specified in the purchase order with suitable supports and lifting eyes, location of which shall be clearly identified. Manufacturer shall provide recommendations for on-site storage and handling.

B. 1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit 2 copies of a written Warranty signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor agreeing to replace defective materials as well as workmanship within 2 years from date of substantial completion.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Control: 1. Manufacturer shall provide and maintain a quality program that provides necessary degree of assurance that delivered items will conform to the purchase document requirements. Manufacturer shall be responsible for ensuring that: a. Each item provided conforms to the specified dimensional, material and functional requirements. Required conformance verifications are performed in the prescribed manner. Certification and labeling is as specified. Quality control certification performed during fabrication is verifiable and traceable to the item after fabrication.

2.

b.

c. d.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF TROLLEY SYSTEM A. General:

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

11010-2

Maintenance Equipment

1.

Provide suitable equipment for cleaning and maintenance of curtain walls and external facade. System shall be manufactured by OTTE AUFZUGSTECHNIK GMBH or Tractel. Proposed system shall be suitable for different areas and applications as required. Contractor may propose several systems for Engineer selection and approval. Proposed systems shall be manufactured by a company having minimum experience of 10 years in manufacturing systems similar to the proposed system for the Project and who has good maintenance facilities in Saudi Arabia. Contractor's shall be fully responsible for design, supply and installation of the system through approved Sub-Contractors. The system shall be fully load tested and shall meet or exceed the requirements of BS 6037, EN 1808, ASME A 39.1, ANSI 120.1 and OSHA 1910.66, including safety factor of 3:1.

2.

3. 4.

5.

6.

B.

Exterior Elevations: 1. Roof Car: a. Roof car shall have a mobile trolley running along roof at a speed of 8 m/min. Lifting Hoist: Unit shall have lifting hoist, capacity 240 kg minimum and lifting speed of 9 m/min. Lifting Boom: Synchronized 2 arms, 6 m long with hydraulic power jacks. Roof unit shall run on a steel track, 1800 mm wide, supported on concrete plinths. Spacing of supporting plinths as well as track size, section and method of anchoring shall be as recommended manufacturer of equipment.

b.

c.

d.

2.

Cradle: Cradle shall have a tubular aluminum construction and aluminum clad panels, 3 mm thick. Floor panel shall be around 2,150 x 720 mm wide with aluminum railing on 4 sides. Cradle shall have 2 foam rollers towards building facade. Cradle shall be suspended from jib by 4-wire ropes. Cradle shall be accessible from roof level. Provide manufacture standard Programmable Logic Control (PLC) unit, remote control and other equipment sensors controls as recommended by manufacturer for proper and safe operation. Safety Devices: Include emergency stop, lower and upper limit safety devices fitted to cradle, emergency evacuation of cradle, overload safety device, slack wire rope safety device, over speed safety device, electric supply cable end limit sensor, end of wire safety device.
11010-3 Maintenance Equipment

3.

4.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

2.2

MULTI LADDER SYSTEM A. Manufacturers Standard multi ladder system shall be used for recessed facades as shown on drawings. Provide manufacturers standard 6 box ladders mounted and guided by tracks every two floors. Each ladder will be approximately 9 m long with variable inclination and will have 4 platforms inside for comfortable reach to the faade at designated heights. The ladders horizontal movement will be manual and will be hidden behind the mesh structure where the curved and straight curtain walls meet when not in operation. Access to each ladder will be provided through catwalks between mesh and curtain wall. The top ladder will be standing on a horizontal track type IPE 120 I-beam while the ladders will be guided by the same. Ladder System shall be as manufactured by OTTE, TRACTEL or approved equal.

2.3

MOBILE ACCESS PLATFORM A. Mobile access platform will be model LEO GT as manufactured by B. TEUPEN MASCHINENBAU GMBH or approved equal. The equipment shall have following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Working Height Cage Floor Height : : approx. 23.00 m approx. 21.00 m approx. 11.20 m 200 kg 1.40 m (L) x 0.70 m (W) x 1.10 (H) 180 : : min. 6.20 m min 1.98 m

Lateral Outreach to either side : safe load on cage Size of working cage Rotating working cage : : :

Overall length in traveling position Overall height in traveling position Net weight :

approx. 3010 kg min. 4.10 m x 4.30 m

Standard jacked area (center of plate, L x W ) : Min jacked area (center of plate) Max load on jack plate per plate : :

min 2.30 m approx. 22.4 kN approx. 1.8 kN/m 360 : : 2 x 15 192

Surface load in standard working position : Range rotation standard jacked area :

Limited range of rotation (both sides narrow) Limited range of rotation (one side narrow) Max Ground Slope :
11010-4

approx. 26%
Maintenance Equipment

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

Climbing ability (in direction of traffic)

approx. 30% : 26%

Climbing ability (crosswise to direction of traffic) Driving Speed Power track Noise level max. : : : 1.3 km/h inside

approx 89 db (A)

Water cooled 2 Cyl. 4 stroke diesel engine

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions and recommendations. Wiring: Comply with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 16 ELECTRICAL. Field Tests: 1. Performance Test: After installation of systems conduct performance test, in presence of Engineer and manufacturer's authorized representative, to demonstrate compliance with Specifications. a. b. Locking and safety devices shall be tested for their intended functions. Visual inspection shall be made for proper installation, alignment and lubrication.

B.

C.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

11010-5

Maintenance Equipment

SECTION 11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parking gate access and exit devices and the related controls and detection devices. For parking management system refer to Section 16785 Car Parking System.

B. 1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM A 446 Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality ASTM B 221 Specifications for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes

B.

1.3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Parking control system providing attended operation at entrance and attended operation at exit. Design for protection against interference or damage by lightning or other electrical influence. Include loop fuse, over-voltage and flash-over protection. Barrier shall be operated via push-button switch located at Gate House(s) or Control Room(s) indicated on Drawings. Provide an emergency release in case of any power failure.

B.

C.

D. 1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in parking equipment with 3 years experience. Installer: Company specializing in installing and adjusting parking equipment 5 years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer and the Engineer.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit shop drawings and technical product data. Indicate on shop drawings, plan layout of equipment access lanes, mounting bolt dimensions, conduit and outlet locations, power requirements, and wiring diagrams. Provide product data on operating equipment, characteristics and limitations as well as operating temperature ranges. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
11150-1 Parking Equipment

C.

D.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

1.6

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. B. Submit operation and maintenance for parking control equipment Include data for maintaining operating equipment and type and frequency of lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. 2.2 Steel: Conform to ASTM A 446; galvanized, grade G-90. Aluminum Extrusions: Conforming to ASTM B 221.

ARM BARRIER AND SUPPORT A. Arm Barrier: Aluminum boom 80 x 20 mm, length as appropriate for the width of gate to be controlled. Arm shall have an internal counterbalance. Provide break line in arm. Arm Clamp: Cast metal, quick change clamp and hub bracket, to permit rapid replacement of arm without fitting or drilling. End Support Post: Square steel tubular section, 50 mm, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 446, 900 mm high, and shall have 3.4 mm minimum wall thickness; with closed cap and baseplate. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, weathertight seams; thermally insulated to maintain cabinet temperature to equipment operating minimum; flush access doors and panels, tamperproof hardware and weathertight gaskets, Conceal mounting bolts inside units. Arm Control: Mechanism to raise and lower arm by instant reversing electric motor, minimum 1/3 HP, enclosed speed reducer operated by self-contained, plug-in, replaceable controller. Components shall be cadmium or zinc coated steel. Design mechanism with slip clutch to prevent breakage if arm is forced, and to permit manual operation. Arm movement to stop and start at reduced speed. For card reader operating arm (if required) refer to Section 16783-SECURITY SYSTEM. Electrical Components: Self-contained, plug-in, replaceable components. Include wiring for control units, zinc plated connection box, grounded convenience outlet, switch for automatic or manual operation, switch to disconnect power unit and thermal protection disconnect for motor.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

2.3

FINISHES A. B. Gate Arm: Manufacturer standard powder-coated finish, 60 - 80 microns thick. Gate Posts and Cabinets: Baked enamel on steel, color shall be as selected by Engineer.
11150-2 Parking Equipment

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that anchor bolts and curbs are ready to receive work and dimensions are as required by manufacturer. Verify that proper power supply is available. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces or substrate.

B. C. 3.2

INSTALLATION A. Install parking control system and components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Entire system shall be installed by the manufacturer's authorized representative. Install internal electrical wiring, conduit, junction boxes, transformers, circuit breakers, and auxiliary components required. Raceways and Wiring: Conform to Section 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

B. C.

D.

3.3

TEST AND ADJUST A. Test and adjust system for proper function.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

11150-3

Parking Equipment

SECTION 11410 TEA ROOM EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of tearoom equipment as shown on Drawings and specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A 526 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality ASTM A 527 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality ASTM A 554 Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. ASTM A 569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent) Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 C. National Electrical Code.

NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association LD 3 High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.

D.

UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. All Applicable Publications

E.

AGA - American Gas Association All Applicable Publications

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each item; include rough-in dimensions, service connection requirements, performances, material, manufacturer's model numbers, furnished accessories, and other similar information.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

11410 -1

Tea Room Equipment

1.4

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled for identification of manufacturer, brand name and contents. Store materials off ground in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, and extreme temperatures.

1.5

WARRANTY A. Submit written guarantee signed by manufacturer and the contractor and for the period two years from the date of substantial handover. The guarantee shall cover repair and replacement of defective material and workmanship.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tearoom equipment shall be standard products of a recognized manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment, and which has been equipped and operating for a period of not less than five years, producing work similar in type and quality of the required equipment. All equipment and accessories shall be products of a single manufacturer greatest extent possible and shall be of best commercial quality. Except as otherwise indicated electric components and component assemblies shall bear either "recognized markings" as indicated in UL Listings of the Recognized Component Index or a UL Label to show compliance with UL Standards, as applicable. Color: Provide manufacturer's standard colors for the selection of the Engineer.

B.

C.

D.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Equipment and component parts shall be new and unused. Items of standard manufactured equipment shall be current models at time of delivery. Parts subject to wear, breakage, or distortion shall be accessible for adjustment, replacement , and repair. Means shall be provided to ensure adequate lubrication for moving parts. Oil holes, grease fittings, and filler caps shall be accessible without the use of tools. Unless otherwise specified herein, no material lighter than #20 gauge shall be incorporated into the work. Gauges for sheet iron and sheet steel shall be US Standard Gauges and finished equipment gauge thickness shall not vary more than 5 percent plus or minus from thickness indicated below.

B.

C.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

11410 -2

Tea Room Equipment

GAUGE #10 #12 #14

THICKNESS 3.4 mm (0.135 inch) 2.7 mm (0.105 inch) 1.9 mm (0.075 inch)

GAUGE #16 #18 #20

THICKNESS 1.5 mm (0.060 inch) 1.2 mm (0.048 inch) 0.9 mm (0.036 inch)

2.2

MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheets: Conform to ASTM A240, Type 304 Condition A, 18-8, having approver finish. A No.2B finish shall be acceptable on surfaces of equipment not exposed to view. Sheets shall be uniform throughout in color, finish, and appearance. Stainless Steel Tubing and Pipe: Type 304, 18-8, having approver finish, conforming to either ASTM A213 if seamless or ASTM A249 if welded. Rolled Shapes: Cold-rolled type conforming to ASTM A36. Galvanized Sheet Steel: 1. Materials: Conform to ASTM A526; where extensive forming to take place, conform to ASTM A527; conform to ASTM A525, coating designation G115, chemical treatment. Galvanized steel sheets shall be cold-rolled, stretcher leveled, bonderized, and rerolled to ensure a smooth surface.

B.

C. D.

2.

E.

Sealant, wherever required, for sealing backsplashes to walls, cabinet bodies to concrete or tile bases, roll-in refrigerators to floors, or other types of application shall be approved in either clear or color to match surrounding surface and applied in accordance with sealant manufacturers' recommendations for smooth, sealed finish.

2.3

FINISHES A. Paint and coatings shall be of an NSF approved type suitable for use in conjunction with tearoom equipment. Such paint or coating shall be durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, non-flaking, and mildew resistant; shall comply with all governing regulations; and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations. Exterior, galvanized parts, exposed members of framework, and wrought steel pipe where specified to be painted shall be cleaned, properly rimed with rust-inhibiting primer, degreased, and finished with two (2) coats of epoxy-based grey hammertone paint, unless otherwise specified.

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

11410 -3

Tea Room Equipment

C.

Stainless steel, where exposed, shall be polished to a No.4 commercial finish. Where unexposed, finish shall be No.2B. The grain of polishing shall run in the same direction wherever possible. Where surfaces disturbed by the fabricating process, such surfaces shall be finished to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Fabricated equipment shall be spray coated with plastic suitable for protecting the equipment during transport and installation. Coating shall be easily removable and shall be removed after the equipment installation is complete at work site or, alternatively, when directed by the Engineer. Exposed surfaces of brass, bronze, or steel shall be plated with chromium over nickel in accordance with Federal Specifications WW-P-541, unless otherwise specified.

D.

E.

2.4

TEA ROOM EQUIPMENT A. Tea room equipment shall include the following: 1. Counter Top 2 Electric Hot Plates a. Dimensions (Width x Depth) = 381 x 743 mm, 240V, single phase, 17.5 Amp. Fast preheat time - heating elements boil four quarts of water in 12 minutes. Elements tilt up to facilitate removal of bowls. Removable porcelain enameled spill-over bowls are easily cleaned. Infinite heat switch with pilot light controls each 8-1/2" diameter 2.1 KW element. Pilots lights are mounted on switch panel and show when element is "ON". Both switches have "OFF" settings. Front access panel is removable.

b.

2.

Single Bowl Stainless Steel Sink: a. Construction: Made entirely of AISI 304 18/10 stainless steel, basin pressed in a single piece with rounded corners and rear backsplash, drain in stainless steel with overflow in chromium plated brass, drawers in AISI stainless steel 18/10 and equipped with guides removable on ball bearings, complete with accessories including tap for sink, spray arm, overflow pipe, false perforated bottom and brass siphon. Bowl dimensions: 60 x 50 x 30 cm; External dimensions: 120 x 70 x 85 cm.

3.

Under Counter Single Door Refrigerator: a. Dimensions (Width x Depth x Height) = 133 cm x 70 cm x 85 cm; Capacity = 325 L; Refrigerating capacity = 250 Kcal h; Refrigerating fluid = R22; Cell humidity = 90; Thickness of insulation = 50 mm.

4.

Bottle Type Water Cooler a. Floor standing model, white, cold water chilled to 10 deg. C and hot water suitable for tea and coffee. Provide complete with refillable, 19 liter polycarbonate water bottle. Dimension 965 x 318 x 318 mm, 13 Amp electrical outlet to be provided.
11410 -4 Tea Room Equipment

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

5.

Trash Receptacle a. Made of heavy gauge stainless steel with cover and removable lid waste container. Dimensions = 350 mm diameter x 600 mm height; Capacity 20 kg.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Each tearoom equipment shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 54, 70 and 96, and manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Each equipment shall be installed in its location after finishes in the area have been completed. Adequate clearances shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer for proper operation of the equipment. Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. Free-Standing Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.

B.

C.

D.

E. 3.2

TESTING, ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Test each item of tea room equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. Verify that accessory items required have been furnished and installed. Remove packing materials from equipment items and leave items in clean condition, ready for operation. Protect equipment during construction period as recommended by manufacturer, and as directed by the Engineer. Replace damaged equipment. the

B. C.

D.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

11410 -5

Tea Room Equipment

SECTION 13150 WATER FEATURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. Water feature equipment, reflection pool and mirror pool with fire sculpture. Accessories related to the above mentioned equipment as required and as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.

1.2

REFERENCES A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 1030 SASO 1031 SASO 1273 Methods of test for ceramic tiles Ceramic tiles Electrical installations of buildings: Part 7: Requirements for special installations or locations Section 702: Swimming pools. Physical and mechanical testing methods of Portland cement. Portland cement, ordinary and rapid-hardening.

SASO 142 SASO 143 B. C. D.

NSF - National Swimming Pool Foundation NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association ASME - American Society Of Mechanical Engineers ASME Code Section IV

E.

UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Water features and other pools shall have a reinforced concrete structure with a ceramic tile finish for walls and floors. Concrete structures shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 3- CONCRETE. Sizes and Shapes: As indicated on Drawings. Ceramic Tile Finish for Walls and Floors: As indicated on Drawings and in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 09310 - CERAMIC TILES.

B. C.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

13150 - 1

Water Features

2.2

EQUIPMENTS A. Equipment shall bear NSF and UL approval, and shall be product of a single manufacturer to the greater extent possible. Equipment shall be of an approved design including all accessories required for complete installation of the water feature and fountain system as indicated on Drawings. Equipment shall include but shall not be limited to the following: 1. Pumps: Submersible pumps; number and capacities as indicated on Drawings. Valves: Float valves, balancing valves and gate valves as required. Fittings, Accessories and Connections: Fountain nozzles, drain and overflow armatures fittings, conduits, wiring, underwater lights, electrical and plumbing connections as shown on Drawings.

B.

C.

2. 3.

D.

Submersible Fountain Pumps: Designed for continuous use, with capacities as indicated on Drawings, and shall have bronze motors and pump chambers, stainless steel strainers and impellers, as well as stainless steel shafts and splitshaft motors in special ceramic casing. Fountain Nozzles (Kit): Fountain nozzles shall be of the size and type indicated on Drawings. Overflow/Drain Armatures: Used for emptying fountains and pools as well as preventing the overflow of pools. Armature shall have a bronze body and stainless steel grate, with overflow tubes that can be shortened and adjusted to the water level. Valves: Provide the manufacturer's standard pressure, reducing valve assemblies with by-passes, gate valves, Float valves, balancing valves/ globe valves as required. Underwater Lights/LEDs: As indicated on Electrical Drawings and Schedule. Fire Sculptures: Fire sculpture shall be electronically controlled, gas lit, and fabricated by the approved fireworks fabricator specialist. Firework shall be built carefully with safety precautions and installed with necessary safety features. It shall be coordinated with fire fighting authorities.

E.

F.

G.

H. I.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install water feature and pools equipment by an approved Sub-Contractor in strict accordance with the manufacturer's approved shop Drawings, instructions and recommendations.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

13150 - 2

Water Features

B.

Provide accessories, controls, wiring and piping as shown on Drawings as required for the proper operation of equipment and the intended application. Contractor shall be responsible for the final layout of equipment in the filter room(s). Supply filter operating instructions with a valve sequence of operation in a glass covered frame mounted on wall near filter system. Number valves to correspond with the Operating Instructions Valves Sequence. Electrical equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the applicable requirements of the latest editions of the NEC - National Fire Protection Association Local Authority, NEMA, UL, SASO, as well as the applicable Sections of Division 16 - ELECTRICAL of this Specification. Grounding: Ground the systems as in conformance with the requirements of Section 16452 ELECTRICAL WORK, INTERIOR. Test equipment and piping, as necessary, to show compliance with the requirements specified. Perform testing in a manner approved by Engineer. Warranty: Water feature/pools equipment Sub-Contractors shall guarantee the installed systems for a period of 2 years starting from the date of substantial completion.

C. D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

13150 - 3

Water Features

SECTION 14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electric traction passenger elevators, motor and controllers, hoistway accessories, equipment and fittings.

1.2

DEFINITION A. Electric Traction Elevators: Defined to include elevators in which cars are hoisted by ropes over power-driven traction sheaves, complete with components, equipment, machines, controls and devices as required for safely operating elevators at rated speed and capacity.

1.3

REFERENCES A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization SASO 201/1994 SASO 466/1986 Steel wire ropes for electric lifts. Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 1: General requirements Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 2: Safety requirements Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 3: Erection requirements Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 4: Methods of test for safety measures for electrical installation of lifts Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 5: measures for electrical installation of lifts. Safety

SASO 467/1986

SASO 468/1986

SASO 481/1994

SASO 482/1994

SASO 490/1994

Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 6: Acceptance, inspections and tests after installation in building. Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 7: Periodic inspection and tests. Electric lifts for passengers or goods Requirements for Periodic maintenance Part 8:

SASO 491/1994

SASO 584/1994

SASO 610/1994

Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 9: Methods of test for single-speed polyphase induction motors for driving lifts.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -1

Electric Traction Elevators

SASO 611/1994

Electric lifts for passengers or goods - Part 10: Singlespeed polyphase induction motors for driving lifts.

B.

ANSI - American National Standards Institute ANSI A117.1 Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People

C.

ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME/ANSI A17.1 ASME/ANSI A17.2 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators Inspection of Elevators, Escalators and Moving Walks

D.

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A 36 ASTM A 167 Specifications for Structural Steel Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Commercial Quality Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube

ASTM A 366 ASTM A 446

ASTM B 221

E.

AWS - American Welding Society AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code

F.

IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code

G.

UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL 10B Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

H.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 NFPA 80 NFPA 101 National Electric Code Fire Doors and Windows Life Safety Code

I.

BSI - British Standards Institution BS 5655 Specification for Lifts and Service Lifts
14210 -2 Electric Traction Elevators

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

J.

EN - European Standard EN 81-1 Safety Rules for Construction and Installation of Lifts

1.4

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Elevator Schedule at the end of Section indicates the required performance, controls, capacities, features and finishes for each elevator or group of elevators.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instruction for each principal component or product, including certified test report. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following minimum information on shop drawings: C. Motor and controller as well as other component locations. Car, guide rails, buffers, and other components in hoistway. Rail bracket spacing and maximum loads on guide rails. Reactions at points of support. Weights of principal components. Top and bottom clearance and over travel of car. Location of circuit breaker, switchboard panel or disconnect switch, light switch, and feeder extension points in machine room. Wiring diagrams showing locations in hoistway and machine room of travelling cables and connections for car power, control, light and telephone. Location and size of trap doors and access doors. Loads on hoisting beams. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room. Elevator control functions and operational description.

B.

Provide product data on the following items: Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators. Car design and components. Door and frame details.

D.

Submit 2 samples 300 x 300 mm in size illustrating floor material, car interior, car ceiling, car door, hoistway entrance door and frame finishes. Submit plans, elevations and details of car enclosures and hoistway entrances. Elevator diagrams shall be prepared to show service to each level. Maintenance Manuals: Submit bound manual for each elevator with operating and maintenance instruction, parts listing, recommended parts inventory listing, purchase source listing for major and critical components, emergency instructions and similar information. Certificates and Permits: Provide the Engineer with copies of inspection/acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by governing authorities to allow normal, unrestricted use of elevator.

E.

F.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -3

Electric Traction Elevators

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. Conform to ASME/ANSI A17.1 and IEEE C1 and as supplemented in this Section. Door and Frame Assemblies: NFPA 80 and UL 10B. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing elevator equipment with 10 years minimum experience. Installer: As recommended by elevator manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.

2.

1.7

WARRANTY A. Provide 2 years warranty for elevator system including coverage of elevator system controller, operating equipment and devices.

1.8

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include description of elevator system's method of operation and control including motor and pump unit, door operation, signals, emergency power operation, and special or non-standard features provided. Provide parts catalogs with complete list of equipment replacement parts with equipment description and identifying numbers. Provide schematic wiring diagrams covering equipment installed, including changes made in final work, with symbols listed corresponding to identity or markings on both machine room and hoistway apparatus. Provide one copy of master electric schematic diagrams, framed in a metal frame with plastic or glass glazing, mounted on machine room wall.

B.

C.

D.

1.9

MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Provide complete service and maintenance of elevator system and components for a period of one year. 1. Include repair or replacement of worn or defective parts or components and lubricating, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevation operation in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Exclude only repair or replacement due to misuse, abuse, accidents, or neglect caused by persons other than Installer's personnel.

2.

B. C.
ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

Examine periodically; clean, adjust, and lubricate all equipment. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original equipment.
14210 -4 Electric Traction Elevators

D. E.

Perform work without removing cars from service during peak traffic periods. Provide emergency call back service during working hours for this maintenance period. Perform maintenance work using competent personnel, under the supervision of the elevator manufacturer. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Engineer.

F.

G.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General Requirement: Provide manufacturer standard pre-engineered electric traction elevator systems complying with the requirements of Electric Traction Elevator Schedule at end of this Section. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components produced by manufacturer as included in standard pre-engineered electric traction elevator systems and as required for a complete system. Elevator machines and equipment: Provide manufacturer standard variable-voltage variable-frequency traction- type, gearless and/or geared hoisting machines as shown in Electric Traction Elevators Schedule at end of this Section. Inserts: Furnish required concrete inserts and similar anchorage devices for the installation of guide rails, machinery and other components of elevator work. Guide Shoes/Rollers: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard units. Car Frame and Platform: Manufacturer's standard welded steel units.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F. 2.2

CONTROL SYSTEM A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard control system for each elevator or group of elevators as required to provide automatic operation of the type indicated and defined in the Code as Operations. 1. Single Elevator Control - Passenger: Provide solid-state Selective Collective Automatic Operation as defined in ASME/ANSI A17.1. 2-Car Group Control - Passenger: Provide solid-state Group Automatic Operation as defined in ASME/ANSI A17.1. Multiple-Car Group Elevator Control - Passenger: Provide Group Automatic Operation with solid-state modular microprocessor for car movement control in a zoned operation.

2.

3.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -5

Electric Traction Elevators

4.

Single Elevator Control - Freight: Provide solid-state Single Automatic Operation as defined in ASME/ANSI A17.1.

B.

Auxiliary Operations/Controls: In addition to primary control system features, provide the following controls or operational features for passenger elevators: 1. 2. 3. Emergency power operation Automatic basement service, where appropriate Distributed parking of cars during off-peak hours

2.3

SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard signal equipment for each elevator or elevator group of same type to comply with the specified requirements. Provide illuminated buttons and signals which light up when activated and shall remain lighted until call or other function has been fulfilled. Fabricate buttons and illuminated signal elements of acrylic or other translucent plastic. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, fabricate exposed surfaces of signal equipment of stainless steel with directional polish or satin finish.

2.

3.

4.

B.

Car Control Stations: Provide car control station in each car with flush-mounted metal face plates, containing call button for each landing served and containing other buttons, switches and controls required for specified car operations and control. Mount at height complying with ASME/ANSI A117.1. Provide operating device symbols as required by Code. Mark other buttons and switches with manufacturer's standard identification for required use or function. Car Position Indicators: Provide either illuminated signal type or digital display type, located near top of car. Include direction-of-next travel signal if not provided in car control station. Provide audible signal to indicate to stopping at each floor. Hall Push Button Stations: Provide at each landing for each elevator or group of elevators, but not less than 2 stations for each 3 elevators or more in a group. 1. For each group of passenger elevators, locate between 2 elevators at center of group.

C.

D.

E.

Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated UP and DOWN signal arrows. Match materials, finishes and mounting method with hall push-button stations. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated signal type or digital display type signal, located above each hoistway entrance. Match Materials, finishes and mounting method with hall push-button stations.

F.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -6

Electric Traction Elevators

G.

Alarm System: Provide emergency alarm bell properly located within building and audible outside hoistways, equipped to sound automatically in response to emergency stops and in response to ALARM button on each car control system. Telephone: Provide telephone hand set in each car, contained in flush-mounted cabinet and complete with identification and instructions for use.

H.

2.4

ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-engineered car enclosures of the selection indicated. Include ventilation, lighting, ceiling finish, wall finish, access doors, doors, power door operators, sill and threshold, trim, accessories and floor finish. Provide horizontal sliding doors of manufacturer's standard flush panel type. Provide manufacturer's standard protective edge trim system for door and wall panels, except as otherwise indicated. Materials: Provide selections as indicated for each car and in accordance with the following, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Enameled Steel Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction, fabricated using cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A 336, commercial quality, class 1, matte finish, stretcher level. Provide manufacturer standard factory-applied baked-on enamel finish, color as selected by the Engineer. Stainless Steel: AISI type 302/304, with No. 4 satin finish. Aluminum Sills: Cast or extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 6 mm thick, mill finish. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent or open egg-crate plastic or acrylic material. Floor Covering: a. Rubber Flooring: Manufacturer standard rubber sheets; 2 mm thick; color and pattern shall be as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard product range.

B.

C.

2. 3.

4.

5.

D.

Fabrication: 1. 2. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.

2.5

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Handrail: Provide manufacturer's standard handrails; matching with interior car finish and continuous on side walls and back wall, unless otherwise indicated.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -7

Electric Traction Elevators

B.

Door Edge Protective Device: Provide retractable shoe on leading edges of elevator entrance doors that causes doors to stop and reopen upon contacting an obstruction in entrance. Photo-Eye Detection Device: Provide electronic photo-eye device with timed cutout, projecting dual light beams across car entrance at the heights of 5-inch and 29inch, that when interrupted will cause closing doors to stop and reopen. Provide keyed switch in car operating panel or toggle switch in service cabinet for disconnecting photo-eye protective device.

C.

2.6

HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard, pre-engineered, hollow metal type, sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances with track system, hardware, safeties, sills and accessories. Match car enclosure doors for size, number of door panels and door panel movement. Provide frame-section size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction indicated on Drawings.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to commencing elevator installation, inspect hoistways, hoistway openings, pits and machine rooms, as constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Notify in writing, of any dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of elevator work. Elevator installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.

B.

C.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's shop drawings, recommendations for work required during installation. instructions and

B.

Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance and replacement of worn parts. Welding workmanship and qualification of welders shall comply with the American Welding Society Standards. Coordination: Elevator work shall be properly coordinated with works of other trades for time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Bench-marks, lines and levels designated by the Contractor shall be used to ensure dimensional coordination of the Work.

C.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -8

Electric Traction Elevators

D.

Sound Isolation: Rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components shall be mounted on vibration-absorption devices, designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure, and thereby eliminate sources of structureborne noise from elevator system. Operating parts of system, including ropes, shall be lubricated as recommended by the manufacturer. Alignment: Installation of hoistway entrances shall be coordinated with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, final adjustment of sills and doors shall be delayed until car is operable in shaft. Clearances shall be reduced to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. Leveling Tolerance: 12 mm, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. Sills shall be grouted with non-staining, non-shrink grout. Units shall be set accurately aligned with and slightly above finished floor at landings.

E.

F.

G. H.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each elevator installation, and before permitting use of elevator (either temporary or permanent), acceptance tests shall be performed in accordance with the applicable requirements of ANSI A17.1 and A17.2, and governing regulations or agencies. Operating Tests: Each elevator shall be loaded to its rated capacity and shall be operated continuously for 30 minutes over its full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature rise of elevator machine during the 30-minute tests period and record failures of elevator to perform as required. Installer shall advise the Engineer, Contractor and inspection authority of governing agencies in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. Performed elevator tests shall include, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Test to determine the safety gear will stop the car with contract load. Temperature rise test at contract load. Load test to measure electrical power drawn. Load test to measure contract speed. Load test to measure floor leveling accuracy. Balance test at half load using winding handle. Final limit switch test. Stalling test-motor run with brakes applied.

B.

C.

D.

3.4

PROTECTION A. At time of substantial completion of each elevator work, suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs or such other methods or procedures shall be provided to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -9

Electric Traction Elevators

B.

Provide similar protective measures for elevator unit which will be placed in temporary service, including inspection and maintenance service during period of temporary service.

3.5

DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations and daily maintenance of elevators and emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation, hand winching and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with the Engineer on the requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner personnel present and just prior to date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. Maintenance: 1. Provide the Engineer with the requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. Instructions and maintenance notices shall be in Arabic and English. A final check of each elevator operation shall be made with the presence of the Engineer, just prior to date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. Installer shall provide a continuous maintenance proposal to the Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on the date construction contract maintenance requirements are concluded. State services, obligations, conditions and terms of agreement period, and for renewal options.

B.

C.

2.

3.

END OF SECTION

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -10

Electric Traction Elevators

ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR SCHEDULE

1 Type Description Passenger Electro Mechanical Drive Machine Room-less 1,600 21

2 Passenger

ELEVATOR NO. 3 Passenger

4 Passenger

5 Service

Electro Mechanical Drive

Electro Mechanical Drive

Electro Mechanical Drive

Electro Mechanical Drive

Capacity (kg) No. of Passengers Car Sizes (m) Width Depth Height No. of Stops Floor Designation Door Arrangement Speed (m/sec) Doors

1,600 21

1,000 13

1,000 13

1,600 -

1.75 1.95 2.20 5 G, 1, 2, 3, 4 In Line

1.75 1.95 2.20 5 G, 1, 2, 3, 4 In Line

1.60 1.40 2.20 5 G, 1, 2 3, 4 In Line

1.60 1.40 2.20 5 G, 1, 2, 3, 4 In Line

1.50 2.250 2.50 9 4 B, G, 1, 2, 3, 4 In Line

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door

1.0 1.50 meter wide stainless steel sliding door (1 -hour fire rating) 2-hour fire rating For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

Fire Rating

As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

Remarks

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -11

Electric Traction Elevators

Type Description

6 Passenger Electro Mechanical Drive Machine Room-less 1,600 21

7 Passenger Electro Mechanical Drive

ELEVATOR NO. 8 9 Passenger Passenger Electro Mechanical Drive Electro Mechanical Drive

Capacity (kg) No. of Passengers Car Sizes (m) Width Depth Height No. of Stops Floor Designation Door Arrangement Speed (m/sec) Doors

1,600 21

1,000 13

1,000 13

1.75 1.95 2.20 9 4 B, G, 1, 2, 3, 4 In Line

1.75 1.95 2.20 9 4 B, G, 1, 2, 3, 4 In Line

1.60 1.40 2.20 5 4 B,G In Line

1.60 1.40 2.20 4 4 B. In Line

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

1.0 1.10 meter wide stainless steel sliding door As indicated on drawing For elevator interior car finish, refer to ID

Fire Rating Remarks

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14210 -12

Electric Traction Elevators

SECTION 14310 ESCALATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THIS SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-engineered, single-story heavy-duty escalators. 1. 1.2 Division 16 Sections for electrical service to escalators, including disconnect switches.

DEFINITIONS A. Heavy-Duty Escalators: Escalators designed specifically for use where high-traffic volumes produce dense occupancy and structural, machinery, and brake loads are much higher than normal. Defective Escalator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.

B.

1.3

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. Rated Speed: 0.51 m/s. Braking Performance: Provide brakes that stop escalator in up-running mode at a rate no greater than 0.91 m/s2. Structural and Mechanical Performance for Heavy-Duty Escalators: For the purpose of structural design, driving machine and power transmission calculations, and brake calculations, rated loads for heavy-duty escalators shall be not less than 2 times the rated loads required by ASME A17.1. Structural Performance of Balustrades, Deck Barricades, and Handrails: Provide components and assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads indicated in ASCE 7 for handrail assemblies and guardrail systems.

D.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and details indicating coordination with building structure and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and power requirements. Indicate access and ventilation for escalator machine space.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14310-1

Escalators

C. D.

Samples: For exposed finishes, 75-mm square samples of sheet materials, and 100-mm lengths of running trim members. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that escalator layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for escalator system being provided. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. Certificates and Permits: Provide Owner with inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted use of escalators.

E.

F.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Escalator manufacturer or a qualified installer approved by escalator manufacturer who has completed escalator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, comply with applicable provisions in ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators."

B.

1.6

WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective escalator work within specified warranty period. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. 1.7

MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of escalator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper escalator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 1. C. Response Time: Two hours or less.

B.

Continuing Maintenance Service: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
14310-2 Escalators

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. Satin Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish. Enameled Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled commercial steel, matte finish, stretcher leveled. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing, select), Kind FT (fully tempered), 12 mm thick.

C.

2.2

COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard heavy-duty escalators complying with requirements. If not otherwise indicated, provide standard heavy-duty components as indicated in manufacturers' publications and as required for a complete escalator. 1. B. Provide escalators with two flat steps at top and bottom landings.

Transparent Balustrades: Manufacturer's standard profile or arrangement of moving handrails on guide rail that is supported by clear tempered glass panels, with deck covers, skirts, trim, and accessories. Guards at Ceiling Intersection: Clear plastic. Handrails: Smooth, jointless, reinforced neoprene. 1. Color: Black

C.

D. E. F. G.

Deck Covers and Trim: Satin stainless steel Antislide Devices: Satin stainless steel. Balustrade Interior Panels: Satin stainless steel. Skirt Panels: Steel tetrafluoroethylene. 1. panels with exposed surface impregnated with

Clearance between skirt panels and steps shall not exceed 1.6 mm.

H.

Steps: One-piece, die-cast aluminum with demarcation grooves at front and rear of tread surface. 1. 2. Step Side Demarcation: Yellow inserts at sides of step treads. Nosing Demarcation: 50-mm wide yellow stripe at nosings of step treads.

I.

Step Safety Sideplates: High-strength, internally lubricated, copolymer guards attached to sides of steps; extending not less than 75 mm below step treads and behind risers; and closing gap between steps and skirt panels.
14310-3 Escalators

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

J.

Combs: Cast aluminum. 1. Comb Color: Yellow.

K. L.

Floor Plates: Cast aluminum with grooved or patterned surface and mill finish. Operational Control: Provide escalators designed and equipped to run equally in either direction. Provide key-operated switches for directional control and keyoperated starter switches located on exterior deck above newel base at both upper and lower landings of escalators.

2.3

OPTIONAL FEATURES A. Fault Indicator: Provide escalators with a microprocessor unit that monitors safety devices, motor temperature, and escalator speed and records in nonvolatile memory date, time, and device identification if a safety device is activated or escalator malfunctions. Provide built-in unit to display recorded information. Reduced-Current Starting: Provide escalator motors with wye-delta or solid-state starting. Energy-Saving Feature: Provide escalator motors and controls designed for motors to run on partial windings (at reduced power) when not under full load. Provide motors complying with NEMA MG 1, Insulation Class B. Brake-Saving Feature: Provide stopping mechanism that allows escalator to coast to a stop before applying brakes, unless stopping is initiated by a safety device. Equip step drive mechanism with automatic step-chain lubricators. Oil Drip Pan: Provide metal pan under full width and length of escalator to collect and hold oil and grease drippings from lubricated components. Design and fabricate drip pan to sustain a load of 1.1 kN on a 0.9-sq. m area at any location without permanent deflection. Direction Indicator Lights: Provide red and green indicator lights at least 50 mm in diameter in balustrade newels at both upper and lower landings. Green light indicates entrance end, and red light indicates exit end. When escalator is stopped, red lights are illuminated at both ends. Combplate Lights: Provide recessed light fixtures with flush lenses mounted in skirt panels at each side of combplates designed to illuminate steps at combplate. Overspeed Governor: Provide units with overspeed governor that is activated if speed of steps exceeds rated speed by more than 20 percent. Upper-Landing, Step Upthrust Device: Activated if a step is displaced against upthrust track at upper curve in passenger-carrying line of track system. Comb-Step Impact Device: Activated if a horizontal force in direction of travel is applied exceeding 500 N at either side or exceeding 1000 N at center of front edge of combplate, or a resultant force in upward direction is applied exceeding 688 N at center of front edge of combplate.
14310-4 Escalators

B. C. D. E.

F. G.

H.

I. J. K. L.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine escalator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine supporting structure, machine spaces, and pits; verify critical dimensions; and examine conditions under which escalators are to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set escalators true to line and level, properly supported, and anchored to building structure. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the Work. Adjust installed components for smooth, efficient operation, complying with required tolerances and free of hazardous conditions. Lubricate operating parts, including bearings, tracks, chains, guides, and hardware. Test operating devices, equipment, signals, controls, and safety devices. Install oil drip pans and verify that no oil drips outside of pans. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

C.

D.

3.3

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of escalator installation and before permitting use of escalators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by authorities having jurisdiction. For escalators specified to comply with requirements more stringent than those of ASME A17.1, perform tests for compliance with specified requirements. Test optional safety devices.

B.

3.4

DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in proper use, operation, and daily maintenance of escalators. Review emergency provisions, including procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Consult Owner on requirements for a complete escalator maintenance program. Make a final check of each escalator operation with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION

B.

ITCC in Riyadh Bldg WH01-04 J09-07800

14310-5

Escalators

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen